Add support for Motorola XGATE embedded CPU
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
3 @c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012
4 @c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
5 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
6 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
7 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/tc-*.c
10 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
11 @c in config/obj-*.c
12 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
13 @c %**start of header
14 @setfilename as.info
15 @c ---config---
16 @macro gcctabopt{body}
17 @code{\body\}
18 @end macro
19 @c defaults, config file may override:
20 @set have-stabs
21 @c ---
22 @c man begin NAME
23 @c ---
24 @include asconfig.texi
25 @include bfdver.texi
26 @c ---
27 @c man end
28 @c ---
29 @c common OR combinations of conditions
30 @ifset COFF
31 @set COFF-ELF
32 @end ifset
33 @ifset ELF
34 @set COFF-ELF
35 @end ifset
36 @ifset AOUT
37 @set aout-bout
38 @end ifset
39 @ifset ARM/Thumb
40 @set ARM
41 @end ifset
42 @ifset Blackfin
43 @set Blackfin
44 @end ifset
45 @ifset BOUT
46 @set aout-bout
47 @end ifset
48 @ifset H8/300
49 @set H8
50 @end ifset
51 @ifset SH
52 @set H8
53 @end ifset
54 @ifset HPPA
55 @set abnormal-separator
56 @end ifset
57 @c ------------
58 @ifset GENERIC
59 @settitle Using @value{AS}
60 @end ifset
61 @ifclear GENERIC
62 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
63 @end ifclear
64 @setchapternewpage odd
65 @c %**end of header
66
67 @c @smallbook
68 @c @set SMALL
69 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
70 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
71 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
72 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
73 @c
74 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
75 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
76 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
77 @c break.
78 @c
79 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
80 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
81 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
82 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
83 @c discretion, of course.
84 @ifinfo
85 @set SMALL
86 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
87 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
88 @end ifinfo
89
90 @ifnottex
91 @dircategory Software development
92 @direntry
93 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
94 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
95 @end direntry
96 @end ifnottex
97
98 @finalout
99 @syncodeindex ky cp
100
101 @copying
102 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
103
104 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
105 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
106 2000, 2001, 2002, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Free Software Foundation,
107 Inc.
108
109 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
110 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
111 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
112 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
113 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
114 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
115
116 @c man end
117 @end copying
118
119 @titlepage
120 @title Using @value{AS}
121 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
122 @ifclear GENERIC
123 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
124 @end ifclear
125 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
126 @sp 1
127 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
128 @end ifset
129 @sp 1
130 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
131 @sp 1
132 @sp 13
133 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
134 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
135 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
136 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
137 distracting the boss while they got some work
138 done.
139 @sp 3
140 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
141 @page
142 @tex
143 {\parskip=0pt
144 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
145 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
146 }
147 %"boxit" macro for figures:
148 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
149 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
150 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
151 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
152 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
153 @end tex
154
155 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
156 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
157 2000, 2001, 2002, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Free Software Foundation,
158 Inc.
159
160 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
161 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
162 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
163 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
164 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
165 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
166
167 @end titlepage
168 @contents
169
170 @ifnottex
171 @node Top
172 @top Using @value{AS}
173
174 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
175 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
176 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
177 @end ifset
178 version @value{VERSION}.
179 @ifclear GENERIC
180 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
181 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
182 @end ifclear
183
184 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
185 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
186 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
187
188 @menu
189 * Overview:: Overview
190 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
191 * Syntax:: Syntax
192 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
193 * Symbols:: Symbols
194 * Expressions:: Expressions
195 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
196 @ifset ELF
197 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
198 @end ifset
199 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
200 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
201 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
202 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
203 * AS Index:: AS Index
204 @end menu
205 @end ifnottex
206
207 @node Overview
208 @chapter Overview
209 @iftex
210 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
211 @ifclear GENERIC
212 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
213 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
214 @end ifclear
215 @end iftex
216
217 @cindex invocation summary
218 @cindex option summary
219 @cindex summary of options
220 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
221 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
222
223 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
224
225 @ignore
226 @c man begin SEEALSO
227 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
228 @c man end
229 @end ignore
230
231 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
232 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
233 @smallexample
234 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
235 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
236 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
237 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
238 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
239 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
240 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
241 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
242 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o}
243 @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] [@b{--statistics}]
244 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}]
245 [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
246 [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
247 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
248 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
249 @c
250 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
251 @c Add an empty line for separation.
252 @ifset ALPHA
253
254 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
255 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
256 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
257 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
258 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
259 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
260 @end ifset
261 @ifset ARC
262
263 @emph{Target ARC options:}
264 [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
265 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
266 @end ifset
267 @ifset ARM
268
269 @emph{Target ARM options:}
270 @c Don't document the deprecated options
271 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
272 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
273 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
274 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
275 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
276 [@b{-mthumb}]
277 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
278 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
279 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
280 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
281 @end ifset
282 @ifset Blackfin
283
284 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
285 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
286 [@b{-mfdpic}]
287 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
288 [@b{-mnopic}]
289 @end ifset
290 @ifset CRIS
291
292 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
293 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
294 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
295 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
296 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
297 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
298 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
299 @end ifset
300 @ifset D10V
301
302 @emph{Target D10V options:}
303 [@b{-O}]
304 @end ifset
305 @ifset D30V
306
307 @emph{Target D30V options:}
308 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
309 @end ifset
310 @ifset EPIPHANY
311
312 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
313 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
314 @end ifset
315 @ifset H8
316
317 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
318 [-h-tick-hex]
319 @end ifset
320 @ifset HPPA
321 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
322 @end ifset
323 @ifset I80386
324
325 @emph{Target i386 options:}
326 [@b{--32}|@b{--n32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
327 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
328 @end ifset
329 @ifset I960
330
331 @emph{Target i960 options:}
332 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
333 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
334 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
335 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
336 @end ifset
337 @ifset IA64
338
339 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
340 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
341 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
342 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
343 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
344 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
345 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
346 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
347 @end ifset
348 @ifset IP2K
349
350 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
351 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
352 @end ifset
353 @ifset M32C
354
355 @emph{Target M32C options:}
356 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
357 @end ifset
358 @ifset M32R
359
360 @emph{Target M32R options:}
361 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
362 @b{--W[n]p}]
363 @end ifset
364 @ifset M680X0
365
366 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
367 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
368 @end ifset
369 @ifset M68HC11
370
371 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
372 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}]
373 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
374 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
375 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
376 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
377 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
378 @end ifset
379 @ifset MCORE
380
381 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
382 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
383 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
384 @end ifset
385 @ifset MICROBLAZE
386 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
387 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
388 @end ifset
389 @ifset MIPS
390
391 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
392 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
393 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
394 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
395 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
396 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
397 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
398 [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
399 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
400 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
401 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
402 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
403 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
404 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
405 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
406 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
407 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
408 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
409 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
410 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
411 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
412 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
413 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
414 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
415 @end ifset
416 @ifset MMIX
417
418 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
419 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
420 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
421 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
422 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
423 @end ifset
424 @ifset PDP11
425
426 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
427 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
428 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
429 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
430 @end ifset
431 @ifset PJ
432
433 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
434 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
435 @end ifset
436 @ifset PPC
437
438 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
439 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
440 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
441 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
442 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
443 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
444 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpw7}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
445 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}]
446 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
447 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
448 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
449 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
450 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
451 @end ifset
452 @ifset RX
453
454 @emph{Target RX options:}
455 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
456 [@b{-m32bit-ints}|@b{-m16bit-ints}]
457 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
458 @end ifset
459 @ifset S390
460
461 @emph{Target s390 options:}
462 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
463 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
464 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
465 @end ifset
466 @ifset SCORE
467
468 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
469 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
470 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
471 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
472 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
473 @end ifset
474 @ifset SPARC
475
476 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
477 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
478 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
479 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
480 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
481 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
482 @end ifset
483 @ifset TIC54X
484
485 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
486 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
487 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
488 @end ifset
489
490 @ifset TIC6X
491
492 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
493 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
494 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
495 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
496 @end ifset
497 @ifset TILEGX
498
499 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
500 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
501 @end ifset
502 @ifset TILEPRO
503 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
504 @end ifset
505
506 @ifset XTENSA
507
508 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
509 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
510 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
511 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
512 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
513 @end ifset
514
515 @ifset Z80
516
517 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
518 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
519 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
520 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
521 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
522 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
523 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
524 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
525 @end ifset
526
527 @ifset Z8000
528 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
529 @end ifset
530
531 @c man end
532 @end smallexample
533
534 @c man begin OPTIONS
535
536 @table @gcctabopt
537 @include at-file.texi
538
539 @item -a[cdghlmns]
540 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
541
542 @table @gcctabopt
543 @item -ac
544 omit false conditionals
545
546 @item -ad
547 omit debugging directives
548
549 @item -ag
550 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
551
552 @item -ah
553 include high-level source
554
555 @item -al
556 include assembly
557
558 @item -am
559 include macro expansions
560
561 @item -an
562 omit forms processing
563
564 @item -as
565 include symbols
566
567 @item =file
568 set the name of the listing file
569 @end table
570
571 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
572 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
573 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
574
575 @item --alternate
576 Begin in alternate macro mode.
577 @ifclear man
578 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
579 @end ifclear
580
581 @item --compress-debug-sections
582 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed
583 to begin with @samp{.zdebug}, and the resulting object file may not be
584 compatible with older linkers and object file utilities.
585
586 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
587 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is the default.
588
589 @item -D
590 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
591 other assemblers.
592
593 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
594 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
595 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
596
597 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
598 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
599 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
600 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
601 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
602 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
603
604 @item -f
605 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
606 compiler output).
607
608 @item -g
609 @itemx --gen-debug
610 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
611 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
612 ECOFF or DWARF2.
613
614 @item --gstabs
615 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
616 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
617
618 @item --gstabs+
619 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
620 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
621 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
622 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
623 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
624
625 @item --gdwarf-2
626 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
627 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
628 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
629
630 @item --size-check=error
631 @itemx --size-check=warning
632 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
633
634 @item --help
635 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
636
637 @item --target-help
638 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
639
640 @item -I @var{dir}
641 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
642
643 @item -J
644 Don't warn about signed overflow.
645
646 @item -K
647 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
648 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
649 @end ifclear
650 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
651 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
652 @end ifset
653
654 @item -L
655 @itemx --keep-locals
656 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
657 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
658 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
659 @ifclear man
660 @xref{Symbol Names}.
661 @end ifclear
662
663 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
664 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
665 listing to @var{number}.
666
667 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
668 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
669 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
670
671 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
672 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
673 @var{number} bytes.
674
675 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
676 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
677 to @var{number} + 1.
678
679 @item -o @var{objfile}
680 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
681
682 @item -R
683 Fold the data section into the text section.
684
685 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
686 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
687 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
688 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
689 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
690 requirements at the expense of speed.
691
692 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
693 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
694 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
695 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
696
697 @item --statistics
698 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
699 assembly.
700
701 @item --strip-local-absolute
702 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
703
704 @item -v
705 @itemx -version
706 Print the @command{as} version.
707
708 @item --version
709 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
710
711 @item -W
712 @itemx --no-warn
713 Suppress warning messages.
714
715 @item --fatal-warnings
716 Treat warnings as errors.
717
718 @item --warn
719 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
720
721 @item -w
722 Ignored.
723
724 @item -x
725 Ignored.
726
727 @item -Z
728 Generate an object file even after errors.
729
730 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
731 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
732
733 @end table
734 @c man end
735
736 @ifset ALPHA
737
738 @ifclear man
739 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
740 for an Alpha processor.
741 @end ifclear
742
743 @ifset man
744 @c man begin OPTIONS
745 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
746 processor.
747 @c man end
748 @c man begin INCLUDE
749 @include c-alpha.texi
750 @c ended inside the included file
751 @end ifset
752
753 @end ifset
754
755 @c man begin OPTIONS
756 @ifset ARC
757 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
758 an ARC processor.
759
760 @table @gcctabopt
761 @item -marc[5|6|7|8]
762 This option selects the core processor variant.
763 @item -EB | -EL
764 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
765 @end table
766 @end ifset
767
768 @ifset ARM
769 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
770 processor family.
771
772 @table @gcctabopt
773 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
774 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
775 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
776 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
777 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
778 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
779 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
780 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
781 @item -mthumb
782 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
783 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
784 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
785 @item -EB | -EL
786 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
787 @item -mthumb-interwork
788 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
789 ARM code in mind.
790 @item -k
791 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
792 @end table
793 @end ifset
794 @c man end
795
796 @ifset Blackfin
797
798 @ifclear man
799 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
800 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
801 @end ifclear
802
803 @ifset man
804 @c man begin OPTIONS
805 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
806 the Blackfin processor family.
807 @c man end
808 @c man begin INCLUDE
809 @include c-bfin.texi
810 @c ended inside the included file
811 @end ifset
812
813 @end ifset
814
815 @c man begin OPTIONS
816 @ifset CRIS
817 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
818 @end ifset
819
820 @ifset D10V
821 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
822 a D10V processor.
823 @table @gcctabopt
824 @cindex D10V optimization
825 @cindex optimization, D10V
826 @item -O
827 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
828 @end table
829 @end ifset
830
831 @ifset D30V
832 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
833 processor.
834 @table @gcctabopt
835 @cindex D30V optimization
836 @cindex optimization, D30V
837 @item -O
838 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
839
840 @cindex D30V nops
841 @item -n
842 Warn when nops are generated.
843
844 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
845 @item -N
846 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
847 @end table
848 @end ifset
849 @c man end
850
851 @ifset EPIPHANY
852 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
853 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
854
855 @ifclear man
856 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
857 configured for an Epiphany processor.
858 @end ifclear
859
860 @ifset man
861 @c man begin OPTIONS
862 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
863 an Epiphany processor.
864 @c man end
865 @c man begin INCLUDE
866 @include c-epiphany.texi
867 @c ended inside the included file
868 @end ifset
869
870 @end ifset
871
872 @ifset I80386
873
874 @ifclear man
875 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
876 configured for an i386 processor.
877 @end ifclear
878
879 @ifset man
880 @c man begin OPTIONS
881 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
882 an i386 processor.
883 @c man end
884 @c man begin INCLUDE
885 @include c-i386.texi
886 @c ended inside the included file
887 @end ifset
888
889 @end ifset
890
891 @c man begin OPTIONS
892 @ifset I960
893 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
894 Intel 80960 processor.
895
896 @table @gcctabopt
897 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
898 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
899
900 @item -b
901 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
902
903 @item -no-relax
904 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
905 error if necessary.
906
907 @end table
908 @end ifset
909
910 @ifset IP2K
911 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
912 Ubicom IP2K series.
913
914 @table @gcctabopt
915
916 @item -mip2022ext
917 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
918
919 @item -mip2022
920 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
921 just the basic IP2022 ones.
922
923 @end table
924 @end ifset
925
926 @ifset M32C
927 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
928 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
929
930 @table @gcctabopt
931
932 @item -m32c
933 Assemble M32C instructions.
934
935 @item -m16c
936 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
937
938 @item -relax
939 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
940
941 @item -h-tick-hex
942 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
943
944 @end table
945 @end ifset
946
947 @ifset M32R
948 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
949 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
950
951 @table @gcctabopt
952
953 @item --m32rx
954 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
955 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
956
957 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
958 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
959 encountered.
960
961 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
962 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
963 encountered.
964
965 @end table
966 @end ifset
967
968 @ifset M680X0
969 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
970 Motorola 68000 series.
971
972 @table @gcctabopt
973
974 @item -l
975 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
976
977 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
978 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
979 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
980 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
981 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
982
983 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
984 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
985 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
986 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
987 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
988 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
989
990 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
991 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
992 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
993
994 @end table
995 @end ifset
996
997 @ifset PDP11
998
999 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1000 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1001
1002 @table @gcctabopt
1003 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1004 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1005 default is @option{-mpic}.
1006
1007 @item -mall
1008 @itemx -mall-extensions
1009 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1010
1011 @item -mno-extensions
1012 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1013
1014 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1015 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1016
1017 @item -m@var{cpu}
1018 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1019 disable all other extensions.
1020
1021 @item -m@var{machine}
1022 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1023 model, and disable all other extensions.
1024 @end table
1025
1026 @end ifset
1027
1028 @ifset PJ
1029 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1030 a picoJava processor.
1031
1032 @table @gcctabopt
1033
1034 @cindex PJ endianness
1035 @cindex endianness, PJ
1036 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1037 @item -mb
1038 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1039
1040 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1041 @item -ml
1042 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1043
1044 @end table
1045 @end ifset
1046
1047 @ifset M68HC11
1048 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1049 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1050
1051 @table @gcctabopt
1052
1053 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12
1054 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1055 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1056
1057 @item -mshort
1058 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1059
1060 @item -mlong
1061 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1062
1063 @item -mshort-double
1064 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1065
1066 @item -mlong-double
1067 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1068
1069 @item --force-long-branches
1070 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1071 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1072 sub routine.
1073
1074 @item -S | --short-branches
1075 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1076 when the offset is out of range.
1077
1078 @item --strict-direct-mode
1079 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1080 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1081
1082 @item --print-insn-syntax
1083 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1084
1085 @item --print-opcodes
1086 print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1087
1088 @item --generate-example
1089 print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1090 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1091
1092 @end table
1093 @end ifset
1094
1095 @ifset SPARC
1096 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1097 for the SPARC architecture:
1098
1099 @table @gcctabopt
1100 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1101 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1102 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1103
1104 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1105 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1106
1107 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1108 UltraSPARC extensions.
1109
1110 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1111 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1112 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1113
1114 @item -bump
1115 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1116 @end table
1117 @end ifset
1118
1119 @ifset TIC54X
1120 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1121 architecture.
1122
1123 @table @gcctabopt
1124 @item -mfar-mode
1125 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1126 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1127 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1128 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1129 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1130 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1131 behaviour in the shell.
1132 @end table
1133 @end ifset
1134
1135 @ifset MIPS
1136 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1137 a @sc{mips} processor.
1138
1139 @table @gcctabopt
1140 @item -G @var{num}
1141 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1142 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1143 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1144
1145 @cindex MIPS endianness
1146 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1147 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1148 @item -EB
1149 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1150
1151 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1152 @item -EL
1153 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1154
1155 @cindex MIPS ISA
1156 @item -mips1
1157 @itemx -mips2
1158 @itemx -mips3
1159 @itemx -mips4
1160 @itemx -mips5
1161 @itemx -mips32
1162 @itemx -mips32r2
1163 @itemx -mips64
1164 @itemx -mips64r2
1165 Generate code for a particular @sc{mips} Instruction Set Architecture level.
1166 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1167 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1168 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1169 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips64}, and
1170 @samp{-mips64r2}
1171 correspond to generic
1172 @samp{MIPS V}, @samp{MIPS32}, @samp{MIPS32 Release 2}, @samp{MIPS64},
1173 and @samp{MIPS64 Release 2}
1174 ISA processors, respectively.
1175
1176 @item -march=@var{CPU}
1177 Generate code for a particular @sc{mips} cpu.
1178
1179 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1180 Schedule and tune for a particular @sc{mips} cpu.
1181
1182 @item -mfix7000
1183 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1184 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1185 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1186
1187 @item -mdebug
1188 @itemx -no-mdebug
1189 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1190 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1191
1192 @item -mpdr
1193 @itemx -mno-pdr
1194 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1195
1196 @item -mgp32
1197 @itemx -mfp32
1198 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1199 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1200 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1201 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1202
1203 @item -mips16
1204 @itemx -no-mips16
1205 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1206 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1207 turns off this option.
1208
1209 @item -mmicromips
1210 @itemx -mno-micromips
1211 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1212 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1213 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1214 at the start of the assembly file.
1215
1216 @item -msmartmips
1217 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1218 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1219 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1220 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1221
1222 @item -mips3d
1223 @itemx -no-mips3d
1224 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1225 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1226 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1227
1228 @item -mdmx
1229 @itemx -no-mdmx
1230 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1231 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1232 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1233
1234 @item -mdsp
1235 @itemx -mno-dsp
1236 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1237 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1238 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1239
1240 @item -mdspr2
1241 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1242 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1243 This option implies -mdsp.
1244 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1245 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1246
1247 @item -mmt
1248 @itemx -mno-mt
1249 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1250 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1251 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1252
1253 @item -mmcu
1254 @itemx -mno-mcu
1255 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1256 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1257 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1258
1259 @item --construct-floats
1260 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1261 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1262 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1263 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1264 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1265 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1266
1267 @cindex emulation
1268 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1269 This option causes @command{@value{AS}} to emulate @command{@value{AS}} configured
1270 for some other target, in all respects, including output format (choosing
1271 between ELF and ECOFF only), handling of pseudo-opcodes which may generate
1272 debugging information or store symbol table information, and default
1273 endianness. The available configuration names are: @samp{mipsecoff},
1274 @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslecoff}, @samp{mipsbecoff}, @samp{mipslelf},
1275 @samp{mipsbelf}. The first two do not alter the default endianness from that
1276 of the primary target for which the assembler was configured; the others change
1277 the default to little- or big-endian as indicated by the @samp{b} or @samp{l}
1278 in the name. Using @samp{-EB} or @samp{-EL} will override the endianness
1279 selection in any case.
1280
1281 This option is currently supported only when the primary target
1282 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for is a @sc{mips} ELF or ECOFF target.
1283 Furthermore, the primary target or others specified with
1284 @samp{--enable-targets=@dots{}} at configuration time must include support for
1285 the other format, if both are to be available. For example, the Irix 5
1286 configuration includes support for both.
1287
1288 Eventually, this option will support more configurations, with more
1289 fine-grained control over the assembler's behavior, and will be supported for
1290 more processors.
1291
1292 @item -nocpp
1293 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1294 the native tools.
1295
1296 @item --trap
1297 @itemx --no-trap
1298 @itemx --break
1299 @itemx --no-break
1300 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1301 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1302 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1303 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1304 break exception.
1305
1306 @item -n
1307 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1308 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1309 @end table
1310 @end ifset
1311
1312 @ifset MCORE
1313 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1314 an MCore processor.
1315
1316 @table @gcctabopt
1317 @item -jsri2bsr
1318 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1319 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1320 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1321
1322 @item -sifilter
1323 @itemx -nosifilter
1324 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1325 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1326
1327 @item -relax
1328 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1329
1330 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1331 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1332 can be assembled.
1333
1334 @item -EB
1335 Assemble for a big endian target.
1336
1337 @item -EL
1338 Assemble for a little endian target.
1339
1340 @end table
1341 @end ifset
1342
1343 @ifset MMIX
1344 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1345 @end ifset
1346
1347 @c man end
1348 @ifset PPC
1349
1350 @ifclear man
1351 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1352 for a PowerPC processor.
1353 @end ifclear
1354
1355 @ifset man
1356 @c man begin OPTIONS
1357 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1358 PowerPC processor.
1359 @c man end
1360 @c man begin INCLUDE
1361 @include c-ppc.texi
1362 @c ended inside the included file
1363 @end ifset
1364
1365 @end ifset
1366
1367 @c man begin OPTIONS
1368 @ifset RX
1369 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1370 @end ifset
1371
1372 @ifset S390
1373 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1374 processor family.
1375
1376 @table @gcctabopt
1377 @item -m31
1378 @itemx -m64
1379 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1380 @item -mesa
1381 @item -mzarch
1382 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1383 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1384 @item -march=@var{processor}
1385 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1386 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, or @samp{z10}.
1387 @item -mregnames
1388 @itemx -mno-regnames
1389 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1390 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1391 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1392 but evaluates to zero.
1393 @end table
1394 @end ifset
1395 @c man end
1396
1397 @ifset TIC6X
1398
1399 @ifclear man
1400 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1401 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1402 @end ifclear
1403
1404 @ifset man
1405 @c man begin OPTIONS
1406 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1407 TMS320C6000 processor.
1408 @c man end
1409 @c man begin INCLUDE
1410 @include c-tic6x.texi
1411 @c ended inside the included file
1412 @end ifset
1413
1414 @end ifset
1415
1416 @ifset TILEGX
1417
1418 @ifclear man
1419 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1420 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1421 @end ifclear
1422
1423 @ifset man
1424 @c man begin OPTIONS
1425 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1426 processor.
1427 @c man end
1428 @c man begin INCLUDE
1429 @include c-tilegx.texi
1430 @c ended inside the included file
1431 @end ifset
1432
1433 @end ifset
1434
1435 @ifset XTENSA
1436
1437 @ifclear man
1438 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1439 for an Xtensa processor.
1440 @end ifclear
1441
1442 @ifset man
1443 @c man begin OPTIONS
1444 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1445 Xtensa processor.
1446 @c man end
1447 @c man begin INCLUDE
1448 @include c-xtensa.texi
1449 @c ended inside the included file
1450 @end ifset
1451
1452 @end ifset
1453
1454 @c man begin OPTIONS
1455
1456 @ifset Z80
1457 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1458 a Z80 family processor.
1459 @table @gcctabopt
1460 @item -z80
1461 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1462 @item -r800
1463 Assemble for R800 processor.
1464 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1465 @itemx -Wnud
1466 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1467 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1468 @itemx -Wnup
1469 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1470 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1471 @itemx -Wud
1472 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1473 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1474 @itemx -Wup
1475 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1476 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1477 @itemx -Fud
1478 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1479 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1480 @itemx -Fup
1481 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1482 @end table
1483 @end ifset
1484
1485 @c man end
1486
1487 @menu
1488 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1489 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1490 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1491 * Command Line:: Command Line
1492 * Input Files:: Input Files
1493 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1494 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1495 @end menu
1496
1497 @node Manual
1498 @section Structure of this Manual
1499
1500 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1501 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1502 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1503 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1504 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1505
1506 @ifclear GENERIC
1507 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1508 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1509 @end ifclear
1510 @ifset GENERIC
1511 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1512 various flavors of the assembler.
1513 @end ifset
1514
1515 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1516 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1517 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1518 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1519 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1520 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1521 particular architecture.
1522 @ifset GENERIC
1523 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1524 machine architecture manual for this information.
1525 @end ifset
1526 @ifclear GENERIC
1527 @ifset H8/300
1528 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1529 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1530 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1531 @end ifset
1532 @ifset SH
1533 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1534 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1535 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1536 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1537 @end ifset
1538 @ifset Z8000
1539 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1540 @end ifset
1541 @end ifclear
1542
1543 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1544 @ignore
1545 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1546 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1547 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1548 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1549 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1550 qualification.
1551
1552 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1553 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1554 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1555 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1556 @end ignore
1557
1558 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1559 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1560 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1561 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1562 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1563 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1564 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1565 @c directives).
1566
1567 @node GNU Assembler
1568 @section The GNU Assembler
1569
1570 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1571
1572 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1573 @ifclear GENERIC
1574 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1575 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1576 @end ifclear
1577 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1578 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1579 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1580 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1581 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1582
1583 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1584 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1585 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1586 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1587 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1588 machine would assemble.
1589 @ifset VAX
1590 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1591 @end ifset
1592 @ifset M680X0
1593 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1594 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1595 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1596 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1597 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1598 @end ifset
1599
1600 @c man end
1601
1602 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1603 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1604 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1605
1606 @node Object Formats
1607 @section Object File Formats
1608
1609 @cindex object file format
1610 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1611 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1612 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1613 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1614 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1615 @ifclear GENERIC
1616 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1617 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1618 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1619 @end ifclear
1620 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1621 @ifset I960
1622 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1623 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1624 @end ifset
1625 @ifset HPPA
1626 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1627 SOM or ELF format object files.
1628 @end ifset
1629 @end ifclear
1630
1631 @node Command Line
1632 @section Command Line
1633
1634 @cindex command line conventions
1635
1636 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1637 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1638 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1639 significant.
1640
1641 @cindex standard input, as input file
1642 @kindex --
1643 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1644 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1645
1646 @cindex options, command line
1647 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1648 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1649 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1650 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1651 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1652
1653 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1654 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1655 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1656 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1657
1658 @smallexample
1659 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1660 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1661 @end smallexample
1662
1663 @node Input Files
1664 @section Input Files
1665
1666 @cindex input
1667 @cindex source program
1668 @cindex files, input
1669 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1670 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1671 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1672 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1673
1674 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1675 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1676 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1677 order specified.
1678
1679 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1680 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1681 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1682 (The standard input is also a file.)
1683
1684 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1685 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1686 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1687 is taken to be an input file name.
1688
1689 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1690 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1691 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1692 to assemble.
1693
1694 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1695 in your command line.
1696
1697 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1698 file.
1699
1700 @c man end
1701
1702 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1703
1704 @cindex input file linenumbers
1705 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1706 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1707 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1708 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1709 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1710
1711 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1712 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1713
1714 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1715 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1716 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1717 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1718 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1719 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1720
1721 @node Object
1722 @section Output (Object) File
1723
1724 @cindex object file
1725 @cindex output file
1726 @kindex a.out
1727 @kindex .o
1728 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1729 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1730 is the object file. Its default name is
1731 @ifclear BOUT
1732 @code{a.out}.
1733 @end ifclear
1734 @ifset BOUT
1735 @ifset GENERIC
1736 @code{a.out}, or
1737 @end ifset
1738 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1739 @end ifset
1740 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
1741 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
1742 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
1743 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
1744 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
1745
1746 @cindex linker
1747 @kindex ld
1748 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
1749 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
1750 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
1751 information for the debugger.
1752
1753 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
1754 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
1755
1756 @node Errors
1757 @section Error and Warning Messages
1758
1759 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1760
1761 @cindex error messages
1762 @cindex warning messages
1763 @cindex messages from assembler
1764 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
1765 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
1766 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
1767 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
1768 grave problem that stops the assembly.
1769
1770 @c man end
1771
1772 @cindex format of warning messages
1773 Warning messages have the format
1774
1775 @smallexample
1776 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
1777 @end smallexample
1778
1779 @noindent
1780 @cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
1781 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If a logical file name has been given
1782 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
1783 the current input file is used. If a logical line number was given
1784 @ifset GENERIC
1785 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
1786 @end ifset
1787 then it is used to calculate the number printed,
1788 otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed. The
1789 message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
1790 tradition).
1791
1792 @cindex format of error messages
1793 Error messages have the format
1794 @smallexample
1795 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
1796 @end smallexample
1797 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
1798 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
1799 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
1800
1801 @node Invoking
1802 @chapter Command-Line Options
1803
1804 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
1805 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
1806 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
1807 for options specific
1808 @ifclear GENERIC
1809 to the @value{TARGET} target.
1810 @end ifclear
1811 @ifset GENERIC
1812 to particular machine architectures.
1813 @end ifset
1814
1815 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1816
1817 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
1818 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
1819 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
1820 by commas. For example:
1821
1822 @smallexample
1823 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
1824 @end smallexample
1825
1826 @noindent
1827 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
1828 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
1829 local symbols in the symbol table).
1830
1831 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
1832 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
1833 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
1834 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
1835 assembler.)
1836
1837 @c man end
1838
1839 @menu
1840 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
1841 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
1842 * D:: -D for compatibility
1843 * f:: -f to work faster
1844 * I:: -I for .include search path
1845 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1846 * K:: -K for compatibility
1847 @end ifclear
1848 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1849 * K:: -K for difference tables
1850 @end ifset
1851
1852 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
1853 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
1854 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
1855 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
1856 * o:: -o to name the object file
1857 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
1858 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
1859 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
1860 * v:: -v to announce version
1861 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
1862 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
1863 @end menu
1864
1865 @node a
1866 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
1867
1868 @kindex -a
1869 @kindex -ac
1870 @kindex -ad
1871 @kindex -ag
1872 @kindex -ah
1873 @kindex -al
1874 @kindex -an
1875 @kindex -as
1876 @cindex listings, enabling
1877 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
1878
1879 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
1880 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
1881 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
1882 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
1883 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
1884 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
1885 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
1886 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
1887 also.
1888
1889 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
1890 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
1891
1892 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
1893 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
1894 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
1895 omitted from the listing.
1896
1897 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
1898 listing.
1899
1900 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
1901 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
1902 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
1903 @code{.sbttl}.
1904 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
1905 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
1906 listing-control directives have no effect.
1907
1908 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
1909 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
1910
1911 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
1912 because it
1913 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
1914 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
1915 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
1916 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
1917 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
1918
1919 @node alternate
1920 @section @option{--alternate}
1921
1922 @kindex --alternate
1923 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
1924
1925 @node D
1926 @section @option{-D}
1927
1928 @kindex -D
1929 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
1930 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
1931 @command{@value{AS}}.
1932
1933 @node f
1934 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
1935
1936 @kindex -f
1937 @cindex trusted compiler
1938 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
1939 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
1940 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
1941 and comment preprocessing on
1942 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
1943 ,Preprocessing}.
1944
1945 @quotation
1946 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
1947 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
1948 not work correctly.
1949 @end quotation
1950
1951 @node I
1952 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
1953
1954 @kindex -I @var{path}
1955 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
1956 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
1957 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
1958 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
1959 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
1960 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
1961 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
1962 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
1963 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
1964 specified (left to right) on the command line.
1965
1966 @node K
1967 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
1968
1969 @kindex -K
1970 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1971 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
1972 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
1973 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
1974 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
1975 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
1976 alteration on other platforms.
1977 @end ifclear
1978
1979 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1980 @cindex difference tables, warning
1981 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
1982 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
1983 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
1984 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
1985 is done.
1986 @end ifset
1987
1988 @node L
1989 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
1990
1991 @kindex -L
1992 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
1993 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
1994 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
1995 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
1996 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
1997 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
1998 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
1999 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2000
2001 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2002 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2003 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2004
2005 @node listing
2006 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2007
2008 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2009 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2010 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2011 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2012 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2013 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2014 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2015 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2016
2017 @table @gcctabopt
2018 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2019 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2020 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2021 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2022 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2023
2024 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2025 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2026 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2027 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2028 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2029 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2030 switch is used the default is to one.
2031
2032 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2033 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2034 @cindex Width of source line output
2035 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2036 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2037 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2038
2039 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2040 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2041 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2042 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2043 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2044 @end table
2045
2046 @node M
2047 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2048
2049 @kindex -M
2050 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2051 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2052 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2053 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2054 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2055 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2056 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2057 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2058 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2059
2060 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2061 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2062 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2063 individually. These are:
2064
2065 @itemize @bullet
2066 @item global symbols in common section
2067
2068 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2069 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2070 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2071 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2072 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2073
2074 @item complex relocations
2075
2076 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2077 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2078 are not support by other object file formats.
2079
2080 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2081
2082 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2083 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2084 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2085 script.
2086
2087 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2088
2089 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2090 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2091
2092 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2093
2094 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2095 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2096 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2097 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2098 assigned within a linker script.
2099 @end itemize
2100
2101 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2102 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2103 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2104
2105 @itemize @bullet
2106
2107 @item EBCDIC strings
2108
2109 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2110
2111 @item packed binary coded decimal
2112
2113 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2114 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2115
2116 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2117
2118 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2119
2120 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2121
2122 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2123
2124 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2125
2126 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2127 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2128 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2129 these options serve no purpose.
2130
2131 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2132
2133 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2134 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2135 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2136
2137 @item other @code{OPT} options
2138
2139 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2140 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2141
2142 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2143
2144 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2145 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2146
2147 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2148
2149 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2150
2151 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2152
2153 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2154
2155 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2156
2157 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2158
2159 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2160
2161 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2162
2163 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2164
2165 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2166
2167 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2168
2169 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2170
2171 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2172
2173 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2174
2175 @end itemize
2176
2177 @node MD
2178 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2179
2180 @kindex --MD
2181 @cindex dependency tracking
2182 @cindex make rules
2183
2184 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2185 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2186 dependencies of the main source file.
2187
2188 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2189
2190 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2191
2192 @node o
2193 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2194
2195 @kindex -o
2196 @cindex naming object file
2197 @cindex object file name
2198 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2199 default it has the name
2200 @ifset GENERIC
2201 @ifset I960
2202 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2203 @end ifset
2204 @ifclear I960
2205 @file{a.out}.
2206 @end ifclear
2207 @end ifset
2208 @ifclear GENERIC
2209 @ifset I960
2210 @file{b.out}.
2211 @end ifset
2212 @ifclear I960
2213 @file{a.out}.
2214 @end ifclear
2215 @end ifclear
2216 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2217 object file a different name.
2218
2219 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2220 existing file of the same name.
2221
2222 @node R
2223 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2224
2225 @kindex -R
2226 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2227 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2228 @cindex joining text and data sections
2229 @cindex merging text and data sections
2230 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2231 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2232 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2233 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2234 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2235 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2236
2237 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2238 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2239 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2240 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2241
2242 @ifset COFF-ELF
2243 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2244 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2245 @samp{.data}.
2246 @end ifset
2247
2248 @ifset HPPA
2249 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2250 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2251 @end ifset
2252
2253 @node statistics
2254 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2255
2256 @kindex --statistics
2257 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2258 @cindex time, total for assembly
2259 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2260 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2261 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2262 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2263 seconds).
2264
2265 @node traditional-format
2266 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2267
2268 @kindex --traditional-format
2269 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2270 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2271 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2272
2273 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2274 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2275
2276 @node v
2277 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2278
2279 @kindex -v
2280 @kindex -version
2281 @cindex assembler version
2282 @cindex version of assembler
2283 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2284 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2285 command line.
2286
2287 @node W
2288 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2289
2290 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2291 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2292 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2293 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2294
2295 @kindex -W
2296 @kindex --no-warn
2297 @cindex suppressing warnings
2298 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2299 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2300 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2301 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2302 are still reported.
2303
2304 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2305 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2306 @cindex warnings, causing error
2307 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2308 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2309
2310 @kindex --warn
2311 @cindex warnings, switching on
2312 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2313 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2314
2315 @node Z
2316 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2317 @cindex object file, after errors
2318 @cindex errors, continuing after
2319 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2320 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2321 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2322 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2323 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2324 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2325
2326 @node Syntax
2327 @chapter Syntax
2328
2329 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2330 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2331 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2332 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2333 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2334 @ifclear VAX
2335 assembler.
2336 @end ifclear
2337 @ifset VAX
2338 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2339 @end ifset
2340
2341 @menu
2342 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2343 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2344 * Comments:: Comments
2345 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2346 * Statements:: Statements
2347 * Constants:: Constants
2348 @end menu
2349
2350 @node Preprocessing
2351 @section Preprocessing
2352
2353 @cindex preprocessing
2354 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2355 @itemize @bullet
2356 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2357 @item
2358 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2359 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2360 a single space.
2361
2362 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2363 @item
2364 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2365 appropriate number of newlines.
2366
2367 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2368 @item
2369 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2370 @end itemize
2371
2372 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2373 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2374 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2375 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2376 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2377 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2378 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2379
2380 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2381 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2382 preprocessed.
2383
2384 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2385 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2386 @kindex #NO_APP
2387 @kindex #APP
2388 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2389 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2390 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2391 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2392 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2393 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2394 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2395 and whitespace.
2396
2397 @node Whitespace
2398 @section Whitespace
2399
2400 @cindex whitespace
2401 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2402 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2403 people to read. Unless within character constants
2404 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2405 as exactly one space.
2406
2407 @node Comments
2408 @section Comments
2409
2410 @cindex comments
2411 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2412 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2413
2414 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2415 This means you may not nest these comments.
2416
2417 @smallexample
2418 /*
2419 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2420 is to use this sort of comment.
2421 */
2422
2423 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2424 @end smallexample
2425
2426 @cindex line comment character
2427 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2428 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2429 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2430 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2431 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2432 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2433 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2434 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2435
2436 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2437 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2438 to specify logical line numbers:
2439
2440 @kindex #
2441 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2442 @cindex logical line numbers
2443 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2444 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2445 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2446 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2447 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2448
2449 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2450 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2451
2452 @smallexample
2453 # This is an ordinary comment.
2454 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2455 # This is logical line # 36.
2456 @end smallexample
2457 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2458 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2459
2460 @node Symbol Intro
2461 @section Symbols
2462
2463 @cindex characters used in symbols
2464 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2465 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2466 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2467 @samp{_.$}.
2468 @end ifclear
2469 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2470 @ifclear GENERIC
2471 @ifset H8
2472 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2473 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2474 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2475 symbol names.)
2476 @end ifset
2477 @end ifclear
2478 @end ifset
2479 @ifset GENERIC
2480 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2481 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2482 @end ifset
2483 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2484 There is no length limit: all characters are significant. Symbols are
2485 delimited by characters not in that set, or by the beginning of a file
2486 (since the source program must end with a newline, the end of a file is
2487 not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2488 @cindex length of symbols
2489
2490 @node Statements
2491 @section Statements
2492
2493 @cindex statements, structure of
2494 @cindex line separator character
2495 @cindex statement separator character
2496
2497 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2498 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2499 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2500 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2501 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2502 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2503 exception: they do not end statements.
2504
2505 @cindex newline, required at file end
2506 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2507 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2508 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2509
2510 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2511
2512 @cindex instructions and directives
2513 @cindex directives and instructions
2514 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2515 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2516 @c 13feb91.
2517 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2518 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2519 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2520 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2521 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2522 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2523 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2524 @ifset GENERIC
2525 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2526 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2527 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2528 language.@refill
2529 @end ifset
2530
2531 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2532 @cindex label (@code{:})
2533 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2534 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2535 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2536
2537 @ifset HPPA
2538 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2539 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2540 only one label may be defined on each line.
2541 @end ifset
2542
2543 @smallexample
2544 label: .directive followed by something
2545 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2546 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2547 @end smallexample
2548
2549 @node Constants
2550 @section Constants
2551
2552 @cindex constants
2553 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2554 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2555 @smallexample
2556 @group
2557 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2558 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2559 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2560 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2561 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2562 @end group
2563 @end smallexample
2564
2565 @menu
2566 * Characters:: Character Constants
2567 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2568 @end menu
2569
2570 @node Characters
2571 @subsection Character Constants
2572
2573 @cindex character constants
2574 @cindex constants, character
2575 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2576 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2577 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2578 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2579 used in arithmetic expressions.
2580
2581 @menu
2582 * Strings:: Strings
2583 * Chars:: Characters
2584 @end menu
2585
2586 @node Strings
2587 @subsubsection Strings
2588
2589 @cindex string constants
2590 @cindex constants, string
2591 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2592 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2593 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2594 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2595 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2596 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2597 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2598 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2599
2600 @cindex escape codes, character
2601 @cindex character escape codes
2602 @table @kbd
2603 @c @item \a
2604 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2605 @c
2606 @cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2607 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2608 @item \b
2609 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2610
2611 @c @item \e
2612 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2613 @c
2614 @cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2615 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2616 @item \f
2617 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2618
2619 @cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2620 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2621 @item \n
2622 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2623
2624 @c @item \p
2625 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2626 @c
2627 @cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2628 @cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2629 @item \r
2630 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2631
2632 @c @item \s
2633 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2634 @c other assemblers.
2635 @c
2636 @cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2637 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2638 @item \t
2639 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2640
2641 @c @item \v
2642 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2643 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2644 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2645 @c
2646 @cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2647 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2648 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2649 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2650 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2651 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2652
2653 @cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2654 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2655 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2656 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2657 lower case @code{x} works.
2658
2659 @cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2660 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2661 @item \\
2662 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2663
2664 @c @item \'
2665 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2666 @c This is needed in single character literals
2667 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2668 @c a @samp{'}.
2669 @c
2670 @cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2671 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2672 @item \"
2673 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2674 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2675
2676 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2677 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2678 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2679 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2680 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2681 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2682 code and warns you of the fact.
2683 @end table
2684
2685 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2686 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2687 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2688 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2689 sequence.
2690
2691 @node Chars
2692 @subsubsection Characters
2693
2694 @cindex single character constant
2695 @cindex character, single
2696 @cindex constant, single character
2697 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2698 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2699 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2700 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2701 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2702 grave accent. A newline
2703 @ifclear GENERIC
2704 @ifclear abnormal-separator
2705 (or semicolon @samp{;})
2706 @end ifclear
2707 @ifset abnormal-separator
2708 @ifset H8
2709 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2710 Renesas SH)
2711 @end ifset
2712 @end ifset
2713 @end ifclear
2714 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2715 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
2716 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2717 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2718 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2719
2720 @node Numbers
2721 @subsection Number Constants
2722
2723 @cindex constants, number
2724 @cindex number constants
2725 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2726 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2727 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
2728 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
2729 are floating point numbers, described below.
2730
2731 @menu
2732 * Integers:: Integers
2733 * Bignums:: Bignums
2734 * Flonums:: Flonums
2735 @ifclear GENERIC
2736 @ifset I960
2737 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
2738 @end ifset
2739 @end ifclear
2740 @end menu
2741
2742 @node Integers
2743 @subsubsection Integers
2744 @cindex integers
2745 @cindex constants, integer
2746
2747 @cindex binary integers
2748 @cindex integers, binary
2749 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
2750 the binary digits @samp{01}.
2751
2752 @cindex octal integers
2753 @cindex integers, octal
2754 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
2755 digits (@samp{01234567}).
2756
2757 @cindex decimal integers
2758 @cindex integers, decimal
2759 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
2760 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
2761
2762 @cindex hexadecimal integers
2763 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
2764 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
2765 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
2766
2767 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
2768 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
2769 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
2770
2771 @node Bignums
2772 @subsubsection Bignums
2773
2774 @cindex bignums
2775 @cindex constants, bignum
2776 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
2777 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
2778 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
2779 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
2780
2781 @node Flonums
2782 @subsubsection Flonums
2783 @cindex flonums
2784 @cindex floating point numbers
2785 @cindex constants, floating point
2786
2787 @cindex precision, floating point
2788 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
2789 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
2790 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
2791 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
2792 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
2793 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
2794
2795 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
2796 @itemize @bullet
2797 @item
2798 The digit @samp{0}.
2799 @ifset HPPA
2800 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
2801 @end ifset
2802
2803 @item
2804 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
2805 @ifset GENERIC
2806 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
2807 @ignore
2808 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
2809 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
2810 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
2811 @end ignore
2812
2813 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
2814 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
2815 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2816
2817 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
2818 (in upper or lower case).
2819
2820 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
2821 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2822
2823 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
2824 @end ifset
2825 @ifclear GENERIC
2826 @ifset ARC
2827 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
2828 @end ifset
2829 @ifset H8
2830 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2831 @end ifset
2832 @ifset HPPA
2833 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
2834 @end ifset
2835 @ifset I960
2836 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2837 @end ifset
2838 @end ifclear
2839
2840 @item
2841 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2842
2843 @item
2844 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
2845
2846 @item
2847 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
2848 or more decimal digits.
2849
2850 @item
2851 An optional exponent, consisting of:
2852
2853 @itemize @bullet
2854 @item
2855 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
2856 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
2857 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
2858 @item
2859 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2860 @item
2861 One or more decimal digits.
2862 @end itemize
2863
2864 @end itemize
2865
2866 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
2867 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
2868
2869 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
2870 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
2871 @command{@value{AS}}.
2872
2873 @ifclear GENERIC
2874 @ifset I960
2875 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
2876 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
2877 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
2878 @node Bit Fields
2879 @subsubsection Bit Fields
2880
2881 @cindex bit fields
2882 @cindex constants, bit field
2883 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
2884 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
2885 @example
2886 @var{mask}:@var{value}
2887 @end example
2888 @noindent
2889 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
2890 @var{value}.
2891
2892 The resulting number is then packed
2893 @ifset GENERIC
2894 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
2895 (in host-dependent byte order)
2896 @end ifset
2897 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
2898 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
2899 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
2900 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
2901 least significant digits.@refill
2902
2903 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
2904 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
2905 @end ifset
2906 @end ifclear
2907
2908 @node Sections
2909 @chapter Sections and Relocation
2910 @cindex sections
2911 @cindex relocation
2912
2913 @menu
2914 * Secs Background:: Background
2915 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
2916 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
2917 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
2918 * bss:: bss Section
2919 @end menu
2920
2921 @node Secs Background
2922 @section Background
2923
2924 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
2925 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
2926 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
2927
2928 @cindex linker, and assembler
2929 @cindex assembler, and linker
2930 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
2931 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
2932 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
2933 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
2934 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
2935 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
2936 sections.
2937
2938 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
2939 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
2940 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
2941 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
2942 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
2943 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
2944 the proper run-time addresses.
2945 @ifset H8
2946 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
2947 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
2948 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
2949 @end ifset
2950
2951 @cindex standard assembler sections
2952 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
2953 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
2954 @dfn{bss} sections.
2955
2956 @ifset COFF-ELF
2957 @ifset GENERIC
2958 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
2959 @end ifset
2960 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
2961 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
2962 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
2963 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
2964 @end ifset
2965
2966 @ifset HPPA
2967 @ifset GENERIC
2968 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
2969 @end ifset
2970 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
2971 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
2972 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
2973 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
2974 assembler directives.
2975
2976 @ifset SOM
2977 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
2978 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
2979 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
2980 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
2981 @end ifset
2982 @end ifset
2983
2984 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
2985 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
2986
2987 @ifset HPPA
2988 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
2989 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
2990 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
2991 @end ifset
2992
2993 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
2994 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
2995 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
2996 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
2997 file is mentioned:
2998 @itemize @bullet
2999 @item
3000 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3001 an address?
3002 @item
3003 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3004 @item
3005 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3006 @display
3007 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3008 @end display
3009 @item
3010 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3011 @end itemize
3012
3013 @cindex addresses, format of
3014 @cindex section-relative addressing
3015 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3016 @display
3017 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3018 @end display
3019 @noindent
3020 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3021 nature.
3022 @ifset SOM
3023 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3024 symbol-relative instead.)
3025 @end ifset
3026
3027 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3028 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3029
3030 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3031 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3032 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3033 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3034 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3035 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3036 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3037 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3038 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3039
3040 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3041 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3042 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3043 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3044 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3045 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3046 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3047
3048 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3049 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3050 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3051 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3052 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3053 data and bss sections.
3054
3055 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3056 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3057
3058 @node Ld Sections
3059 @section Linker Sections
3060 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3061
3062 @table @strong
3063
3064 @ifset COFF-ELF
3065 @cindex named sections
3066 @cindex sections, named
3067 @item named sections
3068 @end ifset
3069 @ifset aout-bout
3070 @cindex text section
3071 @cindex data section
3072 @itemx text section
3073 @itemx data section
3074 @end ifset
3075 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3076 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3077 true of another.
3078 @c @ifset aout-bout
3079 When the program is running, however, it is
3080 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3081 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3082 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3083 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3084 in the data section.
3085 @c @end ifset
3086
3087 @cindex bss section
3088 @item bss section
3089 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3090 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3091 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3092 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3093 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3094 those explicit zeros from object files.
3095
3096 @cindex absolute section
3097 @item absolute section
3098 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3099 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3100 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3101 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3102
3103 @cindex undefined section
3104 @item undefined section
3105 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3106 the preceding sections.
3107 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3108 @end table
3109
3110 @cindex relocation example
3111 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3112 @ifset COFF-ELF
3113 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3114 @end ifset
3115 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3116
3117 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3118 @ifnottex
3119 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3120 @smallexample
3121 +-----+----+--+
3122 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3123 +-----+----+--+
3124
3125 text data bss
3126 seg. seg. seg.
3127
3128 +---+---+---+
3129 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3130 +---+---+---+
3131
3132 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3133 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3134 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3135
3136 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3137 @end smallexample
3138 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3139 @end ifnottex
3140 @need 5000
3141 @tex
3142 \bigskip
3143 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3144 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3145 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3146
3147 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3148 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3149 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3150
3151 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3152 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3153 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3154 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3155 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3156
3157 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3158 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3159
3160 @end tex
3161 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3162
3163 @node As Sections
3164 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3165
3166 @cindex internal assembler sections
3167 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3168 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3169 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3170 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3171 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3172 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3173 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3174 section-relative address.
3175
3176 @table @b
3177 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3178 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3179 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3180 bug in the assembler.
3181
3182 @cindex expr (internal section)
3183 @item expr section
3184 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3185 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3186 it in the expr section.
3187 @c FIXME item debug
3188 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3189 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3190 @c FIXME item register
3191 @end table
3192
3193 @node Sub-Sections
3194 @section Sub-Sections
3195
3196 @cindex numbered subsections
3197 @cindex grouping data
3198 @ifset aout-bout
3199 Assembled bytes
3200 @ifset COFF-ELF
3201 conventionally
3202 @end ifset
3203 fall into two sections: text and data.
3204 @end ifset
3205 You may have separate groups of
3206 @ifset GENERIC
3207 data in named sections
3208 @end ifset
3209 @ifclear GENERIC
3210 @ifclear aout-bout
3211 data in named sections
3212 @end ifclear
3213 @ifset aout-bout
3214 text or data
3215 @end ifset
3216 @end ifclear
3217 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3218 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3219 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3220 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3221 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3222 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3223 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3224 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3225 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3226 constants being output.
3227
3228 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3229 goes in subsection number zero.
3230
3231 @ifset GENERIC
3232 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3233 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3234 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3235 @end ifset
3236 @ifclear GENERIC
3237 @ifset H8
3238 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3239 boundary (two bytes).
3240 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3241 @end ifset
3242 @ifset I960
3243 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3244 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3245 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3246 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3247 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3248 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3249 @end ifset
3250 @end ifclear
3251
3252 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3253 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3254 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3255 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3256 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3257 data subsections as a data section.
3258
3259 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3260 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3261 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3262 @ifset COFF
3263 @ifset GENERIC
3264 When generating COFF output, you
3265 @end ifset
3266 @ifclear GENERIC
3267 You
3268 @end ifclear
3269 can also use an extra subsection
3270 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3271 @var{expression}}.
3272 @end ifset
3273 @ifset ELF
3274 @ifset GENERIC
3275 When generating ELF output, you
3276 @end ifset
3277 @ifclear GENERIC
3278 You
3279 @end ifclear
3280 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3281 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3282 @end ifset
3283 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3284 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3285 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3286 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3287 @smallexample
3288 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3289 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3290 .text 1
3291 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3292 .data 0
3293 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3294 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3295 .text 0
3296 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3297 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3298 @end smallexample
3299
3300 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3301 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3302 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3303 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3304 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3305 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3306 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3307
3308 @node bss
3309 @section bss Section
3310
3311 @cindex bss section
3312 @cindex common variable storage
3313 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3314 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3315 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3316 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3317 section are zeroed bytes.
3318
3319 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3320 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3321
3322 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3323 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3324
3325 @ifset GENERIC
3326 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3327 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3328 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3329 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3330 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3331 @end ifset
3332
3333 @node Symbols
3334 @chapter Symbols
3335
3336 @cindex symbols
3337 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3338 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3339 to debug.
3340
3341 @quotation
3342 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3343 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3344 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3345 @end quotation
3346
3347 @menu
3348 * Labels:: Labels
3349 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3350 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3351 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3352 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3353 @end menu
3354
3355 @node Labels
3356 @section Labels
3357
3358 @cindex labels
3359 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3360 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3361 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3362 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3363 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3364 definitions.
3365
3366 @ifset HPPA
3367 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3368 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3369 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3370 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3371 @end ifset
3372
3373 @node Setting Symbols
3374 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3375
3376 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3377 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3378 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3379 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3380 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3381 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3382 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3383 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3384
3385 @ifset Blackfin
3386 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3387 @end ifset
3388
3389 @node Symbol Names
3390 @section Symbol Names
3391
3392 @cindex symbol names
3393 @cindex names, symbol
3394 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3395 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3396 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3397 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3398 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3399 particular target machine), and underscores.
3400 @end ifclear
3401 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3402 @ifset H8
3403 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3404 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3405 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3406 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3407 @end ifset
3408 @end ifset
3409
3410 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3411 than @code{Foo}.
3412
3413 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3414 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3415 in a program.
3416
3417 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3418
3419 @cindex local symbol names
3420 @cindex symbol names, local
3421 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3422 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3423 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3424 set of local label prefixes.
3425 @ifset HPPA
3426 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3427 @end ifset
3428
3429 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3430 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3431 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols:
3432 @option{-L}}) to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3433
3434 @subheading Local Labels
3435
3436 @cindex local labels
3437 @cindex temporary symbol names
3438 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3439 Local labels help compilers and programmers use names temporarily.
3440 They create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope of
3441 the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple notation.
3442 To define a local label, write a label of the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N}
3443 represents any positive integer). To refer to the most recent previous
3444 definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when
3445 you defined the label. To refer to the next definition of a local label, write
3446 @samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands
3447 for ``forwards''.
3448
3449 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3450 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3451 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3452 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3453 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3454 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3455 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3456
3457 Here is an example:
3458
3459 @smallexample
3460 1: branch 1f
3461 2: branch 1b
3462 1: branch 2f
3463 2: branch 1b
3464 @end smallexample
3465
3466 Which is the equivalent of:
3467
3468 @smallexample
3469 label_1: branch label_3
3470 label_2: branch label_1
3471 label_3: branch label_4
3472 label_4: branch label_3
3473 @end smallexample
3474
3475 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3476 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3477 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3478 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3479 these parts:
3480
3481 @table @code
3482 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3483 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3484 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3485 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3486 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3487 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3488 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3489 you may use them in debugging.
3490
3491 @item @var{number}
3492 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3493 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3494
3495 @item @kbd{C-B}
3496 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3497 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3498
3499 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3500 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3501 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3502 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3503 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3504 @end table
3505
3506 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3507 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3508
3509 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3510 @cindex dollar local symbols
3511
3512 @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of local labels called
3513 dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they become undefined) as
3514 soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain valid for only a small
3515 region of the input source code. Normal local labels, by contrast, remain in
3516 scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined by another occurrence of
3517 the same local label.
3518
3519 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3520 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3521 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3522
3523 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3524 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3525 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3526 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3527
3528 @node Dot
3529 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3530
3531 @cindex dot (symbol)
3532 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3533 @cindex current address
3534 @cindex location counter
3535 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3536 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3537 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3538 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3539 directive.
3540 @ifclear no-space-dir
3541 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3542 @samp{.space 4}.
3543 @end ifclear
3544
3545 @node Symbol Attributes
3546 @section Symbol Attributes
3547
3548 @cindex symbol attributes
3549 @cindex attributes, symbol
3550 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3551 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3552 attributes.
3553 @ifset INTERNALS
3554 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3555 @end ifset
3556
3557 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3558 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3559 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3560 would want.
3561
3562 @menu
3563 * Symbol Value:: Value
3564 * Symbol Type:: Type
3565 @ifset aout-bout
3566 @ifset GENERIC
3567 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3568 @end ifset
3569 @ifclear GENERIC
3570 @ifclear BOUT
3571 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3572 @end ifclear
3573 @ifset BOUT
3574 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3575 @end ifset
3576 @end ifclear
3577 @end ifset
3578 @ifset COFF
3579 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3580 @end ifset
3581 @ifset SOM
3582 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3583 @end ifset
3584 @end menu
3585
3586 @node Symbol Value
3587 @subsection Value
3588
3589 @cindex value of a symbol
3590 @cindex symbol value
3591 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3592 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3593 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3594 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3595 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3596 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3597 called absolute.
3598
3599 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3600 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3601 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3602 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3603 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3604 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3605 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3606 allocated storage.
3607
3608 @node Symbol Type
3609 @subsection Type
3610
3611 @cindex type of a symbol
3612 @cindex symbol type
3613 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3614 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3615 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3616 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3617
3618 @ifset aout-bout
3619 @ifclear GENERIC
3620 @ifset BOUT
3621 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3622 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3623 @need 1000
3624 @node a.out Symbols
3625 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3626
3627 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3628 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3629 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3630 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3631 @code{b.out}.
3632
3633 @end ifset
3634 @ifclear BOUT
3635 @node a.out Symbols
3636 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3637
3638 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3639 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3640
3641 @end ifclear
3642 @end ifclear
3643 @ifset GENERIC
3644 @node a.out Symbols
3645 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3646
3647 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3648 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3649
3650 @end ifset
3651 @menu
3652 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3653 * Symbol Other:: Other
3654 @end menu
3655
3656 @node Symbol Desc
3657 @subsubsection Descriptor
3658
3659 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3660 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3661 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3662 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3663 @command{@value{AS}}.
3664
3665 @node Symbol Other
3666 @subsubsection Other
3667
3668 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3669 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3670 @end ifset
3671
3672 @ifset COFF
3673 @node COFF Symbols
3674 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3675
3676 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3677 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3678
3679 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3680 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3681 @code{.endef} directives.
3682
3683 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3684
3685 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3686 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3687 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3688
3689 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3690
3691 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3692 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3693 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3694 table information for COFF.
3695 @end ifset
3696
3697 @ifset SOM
3698 @node SOM Symbols
3699 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3700
3701 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3702 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3703
3704 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3705 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3706
3707 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3708 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3709 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3710 @end ifset
3711
3712 @node Expressions
3713 @chapter Expressions
3714
3715 @cindex expressions
3716 @cindex addresses
3717 @cindex numeric values
3718 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3719 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3720
3721 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3722 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3723 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3724 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3725 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3726 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3727
3728 @menu
3729 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
3730 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
3731 @end menu
3732
3733 @node Empty Exprs
3734 @section Empty Expressions
3735
3736 @cindex empty expressions
3737 @cindex expressions, empty
3738 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
3739 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
3740 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
3741 is compatible with other assemblers.
3742
3743 @node Integer Exprs
3744 @section Integer Expressions
3745
3746 @cindex integer expressions
3747 @cindex expressions, integer
3748 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
3749 by @emph{operators}.
3750
3751 @menu
3752 * Arguments:: Arguments
3753 * Operators:: Operators
3754 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
3755 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
3756 @end menu
3757
3758 @node Arguments
3759 @subsection Arguments
3760
3761 @cindex expression arguments
3762 @cindex arguments in expressions
3763 @cindex operands in expressions
3764 @cindex arithmetic operands
3765 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
3766 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
3767 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
3768 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
3769 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
3770 instruction operands.
3771
3772 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
3773 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
3774 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
3775 integer.
3776
3777 Numbers are usually integers.
3778
3779 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
3780 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
3781 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
3782 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
3783 assemblers.
3784
3785 @cindex subexpressions
3786 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
3787 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
3788 operator followed by an argument.
3789
3790 @node Operators
3791 @subsection Operators
3792
3793 @cindex operators, in expressions
3794 @cindex arithmetic functions
3795 @cindex functions, in expressions
3796 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
3797 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
3798 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
3799 whitespace.
3800
3801 @node Prefix Ops
3802 @subsection Prefix Operator
3803
3804 @cindex prefix operators
3805 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
3806 one argument, which must be absolute.
3807
3808 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
3809 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
3810 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
3811 @tex
3812 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
3813 @end tex
3814
3815 @table @code
3816 @item -
3817 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
3818 @item ~
3819 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
3820 @end table
3821
3822 @tex
3823 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
3824 @end tex
3825
3826 @node Infix Ops
3827 @subsection Infix Operators
3828
3829 @cindex infix operators
3830 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
3831 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
3832 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
3833 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
3834 absolute, and the result is absolute.
3835
3836 @enumerate
3837 @cindex operator precedence
3838 @cindex precedence of operators
3839
3840 @item
3841 Highest Precedence
3842
3843 @table @code
3844 @item *
3845 @dfn{Multiplication}.
3846
3847 @item /
3848 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
3849
3850 @item %
3851 @dfn{Remainder}.
3852
3853 @item <<
3854 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
3855
3856 @item >>
3857 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
3858 @end table
3859
3860 @item
3861 Intermediate precedence
3862
3863 @table @code
3864 @item |
3865
3866 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
3867
3868 @item &
3869 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
3870
3871 @item ^
3872 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
3873
3874 @item !
3875 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
3876 @end table
3877
3878 @item
3879 Low Precedence
3880
3881 @table @code
3882 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
3883 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
3884 @cindex arguments for addition
3885 @item +
3886 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
3887 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
3888 sections.
3889
3890 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
3891 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
3892 @cindex arguments for subtraction
3893 @item -
3894 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
3895 result has the section of the left argument.
3896 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
3897 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
3898 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
3899
3900 @cindex comparison expressions
3901 @cindex expressions, comparison
3902 @item ==
3903 @dfn{Is Equal To}
3904 @item <>
3905 @itemx !=
3906 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
3907 @item <
3908 @dfn{Is Less Than}
3909 @item >
3910 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
3911 @item >=
3912 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
3913 @item <=
3914 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
3915
3916 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
3917 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
3918 perform signed comparisons.
3919 @end table
3920
3921 @item Lowest Precedence
3922
3923 @table @code
3924 @item &&
3925 @dfn{Logical And}.
3926
3927 @item ||
3928 @dfn{Logical Or}.
3929
3930 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
3931 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
3932 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
3933 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
3934
3935 @end table
3936 @end enumerate
3937
3938 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
3939 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
3940
3941 @node Pseudo Ops
3942 @chapter Assembler Directives
3943
3944 @cindex directives, machine independent
3945 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
3946 @cindex machine independent directives
3947 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
3948 The rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case.
3949
3950 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
3951 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
3952 @ifset GENERIC
3953 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
3954 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
3955 @end ifset
3956 @ifclear GENERIC
3957 @ifset machine-directives
3958 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
3959 @end ifset
3960 @end ifclear
3961
3962 @menu
3963 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
3964 @ifset COFF
3965 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
3966 @end ifset
3967
3968 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
3969 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
3970 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
3971 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
3972 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
3973 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, @code{.bundle_lock}, @code{.bundle_unlock}
3974 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
3975 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
3976 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
3977 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
3978 @ifset COFF
3979 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
3980 @end ifset
3981 @ifset aout-bout
3982 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
3983 @end ifset
3984 @ifset COFF
3985 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
3986 @end ifset
3987
3988 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
3989 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
3990 * Else:: @code{.else}
3991 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
3992 * End:: @code{.end}
3993 @ifset COFF
3994 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
3995 @end ifset
3996
3997 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
3998 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
3999 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4000 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4001 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4002 * Err:: @code{.err}
4003 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4004 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4005 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4006 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4007 * File:: @code{.file}
4008 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4009 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4010 * Func:: @code{.func}
4011 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4012 @ifset ELF
4013 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4014 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4015 @end ifset
4016
4017 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4018 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4019 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4020 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4021 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4022 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4023 @ifset ELF
4024 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4025 @end ifset
4026
4027 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4028 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4029 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4030 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4031 @ifclear no-line-dir
4032 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4033 @end ifclear
4034
4035 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4036 * List:: @code{.list}
4037 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4038 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4039 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4040 @ifset ELF
4041 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4042 @end ifset
4043
4044 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4045 @ignore
4046 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4047 @end ignore
4048
4049 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4050 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4051 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4052 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4053 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4054 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4055 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4056 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4057 @ifset ELF
4058 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4059 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4060 @end ifset
4061
4062 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4063 @ifset ELF
4064 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4065 @end ifset
4066
4067 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4068 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4069 @ifset ELF
4070 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4071 @end ifset
4072
4073 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4074 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4075 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4076 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4077 @ifset COFF
4078 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4079 @end ifset
4080 @ifset COFF-ELF
4081 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4082 @end ifset
4083
4084 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4085 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4086 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4087 @ifset COFF-ELF
4088 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4089 @end ifset
4090 @ifclear no-space-dir
4091 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4092 @end ifclear
4093
4094 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4095 @ifclear no-space-dir
4096 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4097 @end ifclear
4098 @ifset have-stabs
4099 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4100 @end ifset
4101
4102 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4103 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4104 @ifset ELF
4105 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4106 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4107 @end ifset
4108
4109 @ifset COFF
4110 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4111 @end ifset
4112
4113 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4114 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4115 @ifset COFF-ELF
4116 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4117 @end ifset
4118
4119 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4120 @ifset COFF
4121 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4122 @end ifset
4123
4124 @ifset ELF
4125 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4126 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4127 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4128 @end ifset
4129
4130 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4131 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4132 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4133 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4134 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4135 @end menu
4136
4137 @node Abort
4138 @section @code{.abort}
4139
4140 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4141 @cindex stopping the assembly
4142 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4143 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4144 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4145 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4146 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4147
4148 @ifset COFF
4149 @node ABORT (COFF)
4150 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4151
4152 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4153 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4154 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4155
4156 @ifset BOUT
4157 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4158 but ignores it.
4159 @end ifset
4160 @end ifset
4161
4162 @node Align
4163 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4164
4165 @cindex padding the location counter
4166 @cindex @code{align} directive
4167 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4168 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4169 required, as described below.
4170
4171 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4172 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4173 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4174 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4175 with no-op instructions.
4176
4177 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4178 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4179 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4180 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4181 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4182 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4183 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4184
4185 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4186 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or32,
4187 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4188 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4189 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4190 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4191 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4192
4193 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4194 strongarm, it is the
4195 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4196 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4197 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4198 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4199
4200 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4201 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4202 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4203 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4204 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4205
4206 @node Altmacro
4207 @section @code{.altmacro}
4208 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4209
4210 @ftable @code
4211 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4212 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4213 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4214 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4215 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4216 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4217 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4218
4219 @item String delimiters
4220 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4221 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4222
4223 @table @code
4224 @item '@var{string}'
4225 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4226
4227 @item <@var{string}>
4228 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4229 @end table
4230
4231 @item single-character string escape
4232 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4233 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4234 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4235 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4236
4237 @item Expression results as strings
4238 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4239 and use the result as a string.
4240 @end ftable
4241
4242 @node Ascii
4243 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4244
4245 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4246 @cindex string literals
4247 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4248 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4249 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4250
4251 @node Asciz
4252 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4253
4254 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4255 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4256 @cindex null-terminated strings
4257 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4258 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4259
4260 @node Balign
4261 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4262
4263 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4264 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4265 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4266 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4267 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4268 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4269 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4270
4271 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4272 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4273 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4274 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4275 with no-op instructions.
4276
4277 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4278 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4279 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4280 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4281 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4282 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4283 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4284
4285 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4286 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4287 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4288 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4289 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4290 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4291 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4292 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4293 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4294 undefined.
4295
4296 @node Bundle directives
4297 @section @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4298 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4299 @cindex bundle
4300 @cindex instruction bundle
4301 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4302 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4303 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4304 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4305 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4306 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4307 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4308
4309 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4310 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4311 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4312 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4313 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4314 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4315 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4316 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4317 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4318 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4319 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4320
4321 @section @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4322 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4323 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4324 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4325 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4326 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4327 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4328 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4329 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4330
4331 @cindex bundle-locked
4332 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4333 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4334 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4335 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4336 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4337 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4338 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4339 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4340 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4341 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4342 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4343 bundle size.
4344
4345 Bundle-locked sequences do not nest. It's an error if two
4346 @code{.bundle_lock} directives appear without an intervening
4347 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive.
4348
4349 @node Byte
4350 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4351
4352 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4353 @cindex integers, one byte
4354 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4355 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4356
4357 @node CFI directives
4358 @section @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4359 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4360 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4361 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4362 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4363 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4364 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4365 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4366
4367 @section @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4368 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4369 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4370 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4371 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4372 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4373
4374 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4375 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4376
4377 @section @code{.cfi_endproc}
4378 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4379 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4380 unwind entry previously opened by
4381 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4382
4383 @section @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4384 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4385 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4386 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4387 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4388 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4389 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4390 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4391 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4392 no personality routine.
4393
4394 @section @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4395 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4396 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4397 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4398 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be a constant
4399 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4400 no LSDA.
4401
4402 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4403 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4404 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4405
4406 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4407 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4408 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4409 remains the same.
4410
4411 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4412 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4413 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4414 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4415 CFA address.
4416
4417 @section @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4418 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4419 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4420
4421 @section @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4422 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4423 CFA.
4424
4425 @section @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4426 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4427 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4428 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4429 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4430 code it's annotating.
4431
4432 @section @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4433 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4434
4435 @section @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4436 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4437 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4438 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4439
4440 @section @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4441 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4442
4443 @section @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4444 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4445 i.e. no restoration needed.
4446
4447 @section @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4448 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4449 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4450 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4451 the previous saved state.
4452
4453 @section @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4454 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4455 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4456
4457 @section @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4458 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4459
4460 @section @code{.cfi_window_save}
4461 SPARC register window has been saved.
4462
4463 @section @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4464 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4465 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4466 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4467
4468 @section @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4469 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4470 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4471 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4472
4473 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4474 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4475 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4476 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4477 or another register.
4478
4479 @node Comm
4480 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4481
4482 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4483 @cindex symbol, common
4484 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4485 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4486 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4487 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4488 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4489 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4490 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4491 using the largest size.
4492
4493 @ifset COFF-ELF
4494 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4495 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4496 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4497 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4498 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4499 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4500 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4501 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4502 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4503 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4504 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4505 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4506 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4507 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4508 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4509 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4510 @end ifset
4511
4512 @ifset HPPA
4513 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4514 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4515 @end ifset
4516
4517 @node Data
4518 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4519
4520 @cindex @code{data} directive
4521 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4522 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4523 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4524 to zero.
4525
4526 @ifset COFF
4527 @node Def
4528 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4529
4530 @cindex @code{def} directive
4531 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4532 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4533 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4534 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4535 @ifset BOUT
4536
4537 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4538 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4539 but ignored.
4540 @end ifset
4541 @end ifset
4542
4543 @ifset aout-bout
4544 @node Desc
4545 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4546
4547 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4548 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4549 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4550 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4551 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4552
4553 @ifset COFF
4554 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4555 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4556 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4557 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4558 @end ifset
4559 @end ifset
4560
4561 @ifset COFF
4562 @node Dim
4563 @section @code{.dim}
4564
4565 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4566 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4567 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4568 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4569 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4570 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4571 @ifset BOUT
4572
4573 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4574 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4575 ignores it.
4576 @end ifset
4577 @end ifset
4578
4579 @node Double
4580 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4581
4582 @cindex @code{double} directive
4583 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4584 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4585 assembles floating point numbers.
4586 @ifset GENERIC
4587 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4588 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4589 @end ifset
4590 @ifclear GENERIC
4591 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4592 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4593 in @sc{ieee} format.
4594 @end ifset
4595 @end ifclear
4596
4597 @node Eject
4598 @section @code{.eject}
4599
4600 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4601 @cindex new page, in listings
4602 @cindex page, in listings
4603 @cindex listing control: new page
4604 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4605
4606 @node Else
4607 @section @code{.else}
4608
4609 @cindex @code{else} directive
4610 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4611 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4612 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4613 was false.
4614
4615 @node Elseif
4616 @section @code{.elseif}
4617
4618 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4619 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4620 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4621 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4622
4623 @node End
4624 @section @code{.end}
4625
4626 @cindex @code{end} directive
4627 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4628 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4629
4630 @ifset COFF
4631 @node Endef
4632 @section @code{.endef}
4633
4634 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4635 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4636 @code{.def}.
4637 @ifset BOUT
4638
4639 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4640 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4641 directive but ignores it.
4642 @end ifset
4643 @end ifset
4644
4645 @node Endfunc
4646 @section @code{.endfunc}
4647 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4648 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4649
4650 @node Endif
4651 @section @code{.endif}
4652
4653 @cindex @code{endif} directive
4654 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4655 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4656 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4657
4658 @node Equ
4659 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4660
4661 @cindex @code{equ} directive
4662 @cindex assigning values to symbols
4663 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
4664 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4665 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4666
4667 @ifset HPPA
4668 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4669 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4670 @end ifset
4671
4672 @ifset Z80
4673 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4674 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4675 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4676 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4677 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4678 @end ifset
4679
4680 @node Equiv
4681 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4682 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
4683 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4684 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
4685 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4686 undefined.
4687
4688 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
4689 @smallexample
4690 .ifdef SYM
4691 .err
4692 .endif
4693 .equ SYM,VAL
4694 @end smallexample
4695 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
4696
4697 @node Eqv
4698 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4699 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
4700 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
4701 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
4702 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
4703 value is taken.
4704
4705 @node Err
4706 @section @code{.err}
4707 @cindex @code{err} directive
4708 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
4709 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
4710 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
4711
4712 @node Error
4713 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
4714 @cindex error directive
4715
4716 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
4717 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
4718 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
4719 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
4720
4721 @smallexample
4722 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
4723 @end smallexample
4724
4725 @node Exitm
4726 @section @code{.exitm}
4727 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
4728
4729 @node Extern
4730 @section @code{.extern}
4731
4732 @cindex @code{extern} directive
4733 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
4734 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
4735 all undefined symbols as external.
4736
4737 @node Fail
4738 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
4739
4740 @cindex @code{fail} directive
4741 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
4742 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
4743 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
4744 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
4745 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
4746
4747 @node File
4748 @section @code{.file}
4749 @cindex @code{file} directive
4750
4751 @ifclear no-file-dir
4752 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
4753 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
4754 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
4755
4756 @subheading Default Version
4757
4758 @cindex logical file name
4759 @cindex file name, logical
4760 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
4761 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
4762
4763 @smallexample
4764 .file @var{string}
4765 @end smallexample
4766
4767 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
4768 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
4769 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
4770 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
4771 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
4772
4773 @subheading DWARF2 Version
4774 @end ifclear
4775
4776 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
4777 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
4778
4779 @smallexample
4780 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
4781 @end smallexample
4782
4783 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
4784 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
4785 literal.
4786
4787 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
4788 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
4789 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
4790 entries will have.
4791
4792 @node Fill
4793 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4794
4795 @cindex @code{fill} directive
4796 @cindex writing patterns in memory
4797 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
4798 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
4799 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
4800 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
4801 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
4802 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
4803 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
4804 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
4805 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
4806 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
4807 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
4808 compatible with other people's assemblers.
4809
4810 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
4811 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
4812 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
4813 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
4814
4815 @node Float
4816 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4817
4818 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
4819 @cindex @code{float} directive
4820 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4821 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
4822 @ifset GENERIC
4823 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4824 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
4825 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4826 @end ifset
4827 @ifclear GENERIC
4828 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4829 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
4830 in @sc{ieee} format.
4831 @end ifset
4832 @end ifclear
4833
4834 @node Func
4835 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
4836 @cindex @code{func} directive
4837 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
4838 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
4839 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
4840 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
4841 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
4842 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
4843 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
4844 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
4845
4846 @node Global
4847 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4848
4849 @cindex @code{global} directive
4850 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
4851 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
4852 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
4853 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
4854 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
4855 from another file linked into the same program.
4856
4857 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
4858 compatibility with other assemblers.
4859
4860 @ifset HPPA
4861 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
4862 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
4863 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
4864 @end ifset
4865
4866 @ifset ELF
4867 @node Gnu_attribute
4868 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4869 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
4870
4871 @node Hidden
4872 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4873
4874 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
4875 @cindex visibility
4876 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
4877 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
4878 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
4879
4880 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
4881 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
4882 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
4883 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
4884 @end ifset
4885
4886 @node hword
4887 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4888
4889 @cindex @code{hword} directive
4890 @cindex integers, 16-bit
4891 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
4892 @cindex sixteen bit integers
4893 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
4894 a 16 bit number for each.
4895
4896 @ifset GENERIC
4897 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
4898 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
4899 @end ifset
4900 @ifclear GENERIC
4901 @ifset W32
4902 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
4903 @end ifset
4904 @ifset W16
4905 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
4906 @end ifset
4907 @end ifclear
4908
4909 @node Ident
4910 @section @code{.ident}
4911
4912 @cindex @code{ident} directive
4913
4914 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
4915 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
4916 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
4917 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
4918 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
4919 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
4920 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
4921
4922 @node If
4923 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4924
4925 @cindex conditional assembly
4926 @cindex @code{if} directive
4927 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
4928 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
4929 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
4930 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
4931 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
4932 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
4933 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
4934 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
4935
4936 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
4937 @table @code
4938 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
4939 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
4940 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
4941 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
4942 is considered to be undefined.
4943
4944 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
4945 @item .ifb @var{text}
4946 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
4947
4948 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
4949 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
4950 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
4951 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
4952 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
4953 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
4954 string comparison is case sensitive.
4955
4956 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
4957 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
4958 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
4959
4960 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
4961 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
4962 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
4963
4964 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
4965 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
4966 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
4967 equal to zero.
4968
4969 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
4970 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
4971 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
4972
4973 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
4974 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
4975 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
4976 to zero.
4977
4978 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
4979 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
4980 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
4981
4982 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
4983 @item .ifnb @var{text}
4984 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
4985 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
4986
4987 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
4988 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
4989 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
4990 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
4991
4992 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
4993 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
4994 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
4995 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
4996 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
4997 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
4998 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
4999
5000 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5001 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5002 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5003 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5004
5005 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5006 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5007 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5008 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5009 @end table
5010
5011 @node Incbin
5012 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5013
5014 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5015 @cindex binary files, including
5016 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5017 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5018 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5019 around @var{file}.
5020
5021 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5022 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5023 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5024 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5025 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5026
5027 @node Include
5028 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5029
5030 @cindex @code{include} directive
5031 @cindex supporting files, including
5032 @cindex files, including
5033 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5034 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5035 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5036 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5037 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5038 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5039 around @var{file}.
5040
5041 @node Int
5042 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5043
5044 @cindex @code{int} directive
5045 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5046 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5047 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5048 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5049 of target the assembly is for.
5050
5051 @ifclear GENERIC
5052 @ifset H8
5053 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5054 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5055 32-bit integers.
5056 @end ifset
5057 @end ifclear
5058
5059 @ifset ELF
5060 @node Internal
5061 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5062
5063 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5064 @cindex visibility
5065 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5066 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5067 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5068
5069 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5070 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5071 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5072 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5073 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5074 @end ifset
5075
5076 @node Irp
5077 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5078
5079 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5080 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5081 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5082 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5083 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5084 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5085 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5086 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5087
5088 For example, assembling
5089
5090 @example
5091 .irp param,1,2,3
5092 move d\param,sp@@-
5093 .endr
5094 @end example
5095
5096 is equivalent to assembling
5097
5098 @example
5099 move d1,sp@@-
5100 move d2,sp@@-
5101 move d3,sp@@-
5102 @end example
5103
5104 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5105
5106 @node Irpc
5107 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5108
5109 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5110 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5111 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5112 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5113 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5114 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5115 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5116 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5117
5118 For example, assembling
5119
5120 @example
5121 .irpc param,123
5122 move d\param,sp@@-
5123 .endr
5124 @end example
5125
5126 is equivalent to assembling
5127
5128 @example
5129 move d1,sp@@-
5130 move d2,sp@@-
5131 move d3,sp@@-
5132 @end example
5133
5134 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5135 at @xref{Macro}.
5136
5137 @node Lcomm
5138 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5139
5140 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5141 @cindex local common symbols
5142 @cindex symbols, local common
5143 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5144 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5145 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5146 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5147 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5148 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5149
5150 @ifset GENERIC
5151 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5152 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5153 @end ifset
5154
5155 @ifset HPPA
5156 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5157 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5158 @end ifset
5159
5160 @node Lflags
5161 @section @code{.lflags}
5162
5163 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5164 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5165 assemblers, but ignores it.
5166
5167 @ifclear no-line-dir
5168 @node Line
5169 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5170
5171 @cindex @code{line} directive
5172 @cindex logical line number
5173 @ifset aout-bout
5174 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5175 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5176 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5177 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5178 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5179 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5180 @end ifset
5181
5182 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5183 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5184 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5185 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5186 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5187
5188 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5189 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5190 debugging.
5191 @end ifclear
5192
5193 @node Linkonce
5194 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5195 @cindex COMDAT
5196 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5197 @cindex common sections
5198 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5199 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5200 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5201 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5202 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5203 unique.
5204
5205 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5206 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5207 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5208
5209 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5210 following strings. For example:
5211 @smallexample
5212 .linkonce same_size
5213 @end smallexample
5214 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5215
5216 @table @code
5217 @item discard
5218 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5219
5220 @item one_only
5221 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5222
5223 @item same_size
5224 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5225
5226 @item same_contents
5227 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5228 @end table
5229
5230 @node List
5231 @section @code{.list}
5232
5233 @cindex @code{list} directive
5234 @cindex listing control, turning on
5235 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5236 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5237 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5238 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5239 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5240
5241 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5242 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5243 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5244
5245 @node Ln
5246 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5247
5248 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5249 @ifclear no-line-dir
5250 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5251 @end ifclear
5252 @ifset no-line-dir
5253 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5254 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5255 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5256 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5257 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5258 @ifset BOUT
5259
5260 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5261 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5262 output format.
5263 @end ifset
5264 @end ifset
5265
5266 @node Loc
5267 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5268 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5269 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5270 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5271 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5272 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5273 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5274 the row is added.
5275
5276 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5277
5278 @table @code
5279 @item basic_block
5280 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5281 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5282
5283 @item prologue_end
5284 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5285 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5286
5287 @item epilogue_begin
5288 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5289 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5290
5291 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5292 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5293 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5294 either 0 or 1.
5295
5296 @item isa @var{value}
5297 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5298 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5299
5300 @item discriminator @var{value}
5301 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5302 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5303
5304 @end table
5305
5306 @node Loc_mark_labels
5307 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5308 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5309 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5310 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5311 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5312 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5313 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5314 this function respectively.
5315
5316 @ifset ELF
5317 @node Local
5318 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5319
5320 @cindex @code{local} directive
5321 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5322 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5323 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5324 they will be created.
5325
5326 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5327 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5328 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5329 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5330 @end ifset
5331
5332 @node Long
5333 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5334
5335 @cindex @code{long} directive
5336 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5337
5338 @ignore
5339 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5340 @c what it really ought to do
5341 @node Lsym
5342 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5343
5344 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5345 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5346 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5347 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5348 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5349 the same as the expression value:
5350 @smallexample
5351 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5352 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5353 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5354 @end smallexample
5355 @noindent
5356 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5357 @end ignore
5358
5359 @node Macro
5360 @section @code{.macro}
5361
5362 @cindex macros
5363 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5364 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5365 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5366
5367 @example
5368 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5369 .long \from
5370 .if \to-\from
5371 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5372 .endif
5373 .endm
5374 @end example
5375
5376 @noindent
5377 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5378
5379 @example
5380 .long 0
5381 .long 1
5382 .long 2
5383 .long 3
5384 .long 4
5385 .long 5
5386 @end example
5387
5388 @ftable @code
5389 @item .macro @var{macname}
5390 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5391 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5392 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5393 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5394 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5395 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5396 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5397 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5398 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5399 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5400 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5401 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5402
5403 @table @code
5404 @item .macro comm
5405 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5406 arguments.
5407
5408 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5409 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5410 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5411 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5412 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5413
5414 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5415 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5416 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5417 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5418 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5419 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5420 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5421 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5422
5423 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5424 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5425 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5426 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5427 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5428
5429 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5430 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5431 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5432
5433 @end table
5434
5435 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5436 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5437 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5438 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5439 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5440 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5441 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5442 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5443 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5444 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5445 this macro definition:
5446
5447 @example
5448 .macro label l
5449 \l:
5450 .endm
5451 @end example
5452
5453 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5454 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5455 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5456 identifier.
5457
5458 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5459 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5460 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5461 length specifier like this:
5462
5463 @example
5464 .macro opcode base length
5465 \base.\length
5466 .endm
5467 @end example
5468
5469 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5470 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5471 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5472
5473 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5474
5475 @table @code
5476 @item Insert white space
5477 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5478 solution. eg:
5479
5480 @example
5481 .macro label l
5482 \l :
5483 .endm
5484 @end example
5485
5486 @item Use @samp{\()}
5487 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5488 the following text. eg:
5489
5490 @example
5491 .macro opcode base length
5492 \base\().\length
5493 .endm
5494 @end example
5495
5496 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5497 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5498 used as a separator. eg:
5499
5500 @example
5501 .altmacro
5502 .macro label l
5503 l&:
5504 .endm
5505 @end example
5506 @end table
5507
5508 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5509 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5510 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5511
5512 @item .endm
5513 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5514 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5515
5516 @item .exitm
5517 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5518 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5519
5520 @cindex number of macros executed
5521 @cindex macros, count executed
5522 @item \@@
5523 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5524 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5525 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5526
5527 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5528 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5529 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5530 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5531 @end ftable
5532
5533 @node MRI
5534 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5535
5536 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5537 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5538 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5539 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5540 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5541 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5542
5543 @node Noaltmacro
5544 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5545 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5546
5547 @node Nolist
5548 @section @code{.nolist}
5549
5550 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5551 @cindex listing control, turning off
5552 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5553 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5554 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5555 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5556 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5557
5558 @node Octa
5559 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5560
5561 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5562 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5563 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5564 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5565 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5566 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5567
5568 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5569 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5570
5571 @node Offset
5572 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5573
5574 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5575 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5576 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5577 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5578 directive.
5579
5580 @node Org
5581 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5582
5583 @cindex @code{org} directive
5584 @cindex location counter, advancing
5585 @cindex advancing location counter
5586 @cindex current address, advancing
5587 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5588 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5589 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5590 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5591 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5592 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5593 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5594 is the same as the current subsection.
5595
5596 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5597 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5598 backwards.
5599
5600 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5601 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5602 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5603 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5604 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5605 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5606
5607 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5608 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5609 people's assemblers.
5610
5611 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5612 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5613 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5614 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5615
5616 @node P2align
5617 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5618
5619 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5620 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5621 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5622 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5623 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5624 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5625 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5626 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5627
5628 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5629 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5630 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5631 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5632 with no-op instructions.
5633
5634 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5635 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5636 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5637 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5638 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5639 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5640 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5641
5642 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5643 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5644 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5645 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5646 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5647 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
5648 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
5649 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5650 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5651 undefined.
5652
5653 @ifset ELF
5654 @node PopSection
5655 @section @code{.popsection}
5656
5657 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
5658 @cindex Section Stack
5659 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5660 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5661 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5662 (@pxref{Previous}).
5663
5664 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5665 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
5666 stack.
5667 @end ifset
5668
5669 @ifset ELF
5670 @node Previous
5671 @section @code{.previous}
5672
5673 @cindex @code{previous} directive
5674 @cindex Section Stack
5675 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5676 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5677 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5678 (@pxref{PopSection}).
5679
5680 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5681 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
5682 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5683 subsections). For example:
5684
5685 @smallexample
5686 .section A
5687 .subsection 1
5688 .word 0x1234
5689 .subsection 2
5690 .word 0x5678
5691 .previous
5692 .word 0x9abc
5693 @end smallexample
5694
5695 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
5696 section A. Whilst:
5697
5698 @smallexample
5699 .section A
5700 .subsection 1
5701 # Now in section A subsection 1
5702 .word 0x1234
5703 .section B
5704 .subsection 0
5705 # Now in section B subsection 0
5706 .word 0x5678
5707 .subsection 1
5708 # Now in section B subsection 1
5709 .word 0x9abc
5710 .previous
5711 # Now in section B subsection 0
5712 .word 0xdef0
5713 @end smallexample
5714
5715 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
5716 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
5717
5718 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
5719 the top section on the section stack.
5720 @end ifset
5721
5722 @node Print
5723 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
5724
5725 @cindex @code{print} directive
5726 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
5727 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
5728
5729 @ifset ELF
5730 @node Protected
5731 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
5732
5733 @cindex @code{protected} directive
5734 @cindex visibility
5735 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5736 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
5737
5738 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5739 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5740 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
5741 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
5742 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
5743 this.
5744 @end ifset
5745
5746 @node Psize
5747 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
5748
5749 @cindex @code{psize} directive
5750 @cindex listing control: paper size
5751 @cindex paper size, for listings
5752 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
5753 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
5754
5755 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
5756 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
5757 default width is 200 columns.
5758
5759 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
5760 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
5761 @code{.eject}).
5762
5763 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
5764 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
5765
5766 @node Purgem
5767 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
5768
5769 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
5770 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
5771 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
5772
5773 @ifset ELF
5774 @node PushSection
5775 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
5776
5777 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
5778 @cindex Section Stack
5779 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5780 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5781 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
5782 (@pxref{Previous}).
5783
5784 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
5785 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
5786 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
5787 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
5788 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
5789 @end ifset
5790
5791 @node Quad
5792 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
5793
5794 @cindex @code{quad} directive
5795 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
5796 each bignum, it emits
5797 @ifclear bignum-16
5798 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
5799 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
5800 @cindex eight-byte integer
5801 @cindex integer, 8-byte
5802
5803 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5804 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
5805 @end ifclear
5806 @ifset bignum-16
5807 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
5808 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
5809 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
5810 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5811 @end ifset
5812
5813 @node Reloc
5814 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
5815
5816 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
5817 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
5818 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
5819 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
5820 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
5821 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
5822 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
5823 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
5824 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
5825 section.
5826
5827 @node Rept
5828 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
5829
5830 @cindex @code{rept} directive
5831 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
5832 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
5833
5834 For example, assembling
5835
5836 @example
5837 .rept 3
5838 .long 0
5839 .endr
5840 @end example
5841
5842 is equivalent to assembling
5843
5844 @example
5845 .long 0
5846 .long 0
5847 .long 0
5848 @end example
5849
5850 @node Sbttl
5851 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
5852
5853 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
5854 @cindex subtitles for listings
5855 @cindex listing control: subtitle
5856 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
5857 title line) when generating assembly listings.
5858
5859 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
5860 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
5861
5862 @ifset COFF
5863 @node Scl
5864 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
5865
5866 @cindex @code{scl} directive
5867 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
5868 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
5869 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
5870 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
5871 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
5872 symbolic debugging information.
5873 @ifset BOUT
5874
5875 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
5876 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
5877 accepts this directive but ignores it.
5878 @end ifset
5879 @end ifset
5880
5881 @ifset COFF-ELF
5882 @node Section
5883 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
5884
5885 @cindex named section
5886 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
5887 named @var{name}.
5888
5889 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
5890 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
5891 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
5892
5893 @ifset COFF
5894 @ifset ELF
5895 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
5896 @subheading COFF Version
5897 @end ifset
5898
5899 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
5900 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
5901 ways:
5902
5903 @smallexample
5904 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
5905 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
5906 @end smallexample
5907
5908 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
5909 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
5910 @table @code
5911 @item b
5912 bss section (uninitialized data)
5913 @item n
5914 section is not loaded
5915 @item w
5916 writable section
5917 @item d
5918 data section
5919 @item r
5920 read-only section
5921 @item x
5922 executable section
5923 @item s
5924 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
5925 @item a
5926 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
5927 @item y
5928 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
5929 @item 0-9
5930 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
5931 @end table
5932
5933 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
5934 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
5935 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
5936 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
5937 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
5938
5939 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
5940 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
5941 @end ifset
5942
5943 @ifset ELF
5944 @ifset COFF
5945 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
5946 @subheading ELF Version
5947 @end ifset
5948
5949 @cindex Section Stack
5950 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5951 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
5952 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
5953 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
5954
5955 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
5956 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
5957
5958 @smallexample
5959 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
5960 @end smallexample
5961
5962 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
5963 combination of the following characters:
5964 @table @code
5965 @item a
5966 section is allocatable
5967 @item e
5968 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
5969 @item w
5970 section is writable
5971 @item x
5972 section is executable
5973 @item M
5974 section is mergeable
5975 @item S
5976 section contains zero terminated strings
5977 @item G
5978 section is a member of a section group
5979 @item T
5980 section is used for thread-local-storage
5981 @item ?
5982 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
5983 @end table
5984
5985 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
5986 @table @code
5987 @item @@progbits
5988 section contains data
5989 @item @@nobits
5990 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
5991 @item @@note
5992 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
5993 @item @@init_array
5994 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
5995 @item @@fini_array
5996 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
5997 @item @@preinit_array
5998 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
5999 @end table
6000
6001 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6002
6003 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6004 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6005 @code{%} character.
6006
6007 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6008 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6009
6010 @smallexample
6011 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6012 @end smallexample
6013
6014 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6015 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6016 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6017 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6018 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6019 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6020 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6021 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6022 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6023
6024 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6025 be present along with an additional field like this:
6026
6027 @smallexample
6028 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6029 @end smallexample
6030
6031 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6032 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6033 @table @code
6034 @item comdat
6035 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6036 @item .gnu.linkonce
6037 an alias for comdat
6038 @end table
6039
6040 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6041 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6042
6043 @smallexample
6044 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6045 @end smallexample
6046
6047 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6048 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6049 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6050 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6051 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6052 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6053
6054 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6055 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6056 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6057 executable. The section will contain data.
6058
6059 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6060 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6061
6062 @smallexample
6063 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6064 @end smallexample
6065
6066 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6067 separated flags:
6068 @table @code
6069 @item #alloc
6070 section is allocatable
6071 @item #write
6072 section is writable
6073 @item #execinstr
6074 section is executable
6075 @item #exclude
6076 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6077 @item #tls
6078 section is used for thread local storage
6079 @end table
6080
6081 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6082 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6083 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6084 work.
6085 @end ifset
6086 @end ifset
6087
6088 @node Set
6089 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6090
6091 @cindex @code{set} directive
6092 @cindex symbol value, setting
6093 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6094 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6095 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6096 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6097
6098 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly.
6099
6100 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6101 file is the last value stored into it.
6102
6103 @ifset Z80
6104 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6105 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6106 @end ifset
6107
6108 @node Short
6109 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6110
6111 @cindex @code{short} directive
6112 @ifset GENERIC
6113 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6114 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6115
6116 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6117 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6118 @end ifset
6119 @ifclear GENERIC
6120 @ifset W16
6121 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6122 @end ifset
6123 @ifset W32
6124 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6125 a 16 bit number for each.
6126 @end ifset
6127 @end ifclear
6128
6129 @node Single
6130 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6131
6132 @cindex @code{single} directive
6133 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6134 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6135 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6136 @ifset GENERIC
6137 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6138 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6139 @end ifset
6140 @ifclear GENERIC
6141 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6142 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6143 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6144 @end ifset
6145 @end ifclear
6146
6147 @ifset COFF-ELF
6148 @node Size
6149 @section @code{.size}
6150
6151 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6152
6153 @ifset COFF
6154 @ifset ELF
6155 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6156 @subheading COFF Version
6157 @end ifset
6158
6159 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6160 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6161 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6162
6163 @smallexample
6164 .size @var{expression}
6165 @end smallexample
6166
6167 @ifset BOUT
6168 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6169 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6170 ignores it.
6171 @end ifset
6172 @end ifset
6173
6174 @ifset ELF
6175 @ifset COFF
6176 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6177 @subheading ELF Version
6178 @end ifset
6179
6180 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6181 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6182
6183 @smallexample
6184 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6185 @end smallexample
6186
6187 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6188 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6189 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6190 symbols.
6191 @end ifset
6192 @end ifset
6193
6194 @ifclear no-space-dir
6195 @node Skip
6196 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6197
6198 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6199 @cindex filling memory
6200 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6201 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6202 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6203 @samp{.space}.
6204 @end ifclear
6205
6206 @node Sleb128
6207 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6208
6209 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6210 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6211 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6212 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6213
6214 @ifclear no-space-dir
6215 @node Space
6216 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6217
6218 @cindex @code{space} directive
6219 @cindex filling memory
6220 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6221 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6222 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6223 as @samp{.skip}.
6224
6225 @ifset HPPA
6226 @quotation
6227 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6228 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6229 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6230 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6231 for a summary.
6232 @end quotation
6233 @end ifset
6234 @end ifclear
6235
6236 @ifset have-stabs
6237 @node Stab
6238 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6239
6240 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6241 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6242 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6243 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6244 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6245 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6246 Up to five fields are required:
6247
6248 @table @var
6249 @item string
6250 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6251 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6252 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6253 using this field.
6254
6255 @item type
6256 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6257 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6258 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6259
6260 @item other
6261 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6262 low 8 bits of this expression.
6263
6264 @item desc
6265 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6266 bits of this expression.
6267
6268 @item value
6269 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6270 @end table
6271
6272 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6273 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6274 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6275 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6276
6277 @table @code
6278 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6279 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6280
6281 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6282 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6283 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6284 strings.
6285
6286 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6287 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6288 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6289 assembled.
6290
6291 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6292 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6293 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6294
6295 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6296 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6297 All five fields are specified.
6298 @end table
6299 @end ifset
6300 @c end have-stabs
6301
6302 @node String
6303 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6304 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6305
6306 @cindex string, copying to object file
6307 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6308 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6309 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6310 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6311 @cindex @code{string} directive
6312 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6313 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6314 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6315 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6316
6317 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6318 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6319 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6320 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6321
6322 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6323 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6324 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6325 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6326
6327 Example:
6328 @smallexample
6329 .string32 "BYE"
6330 expands to:
6331 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6332 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6333 @end smallexample
6334
6335
6336 @node Struct
6337 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6338
6339 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6340 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6341 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6342 @smallexample
6343 .struct 0
6344 field1:
6345 .struct field1 + 4
6346 field2:
6347 .struct field2 + 4
6348 field3:
6349 @end smallexample
6350 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6351 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6352 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6353 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6354 before further assembly.
6355
6356 @ifset ELF
6357 @node SubSection
6358 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6359
6360 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6361 @cindex Section Stack
6362 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6363 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6364 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6365 (@pxref{Previous}).
6366
6367 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6368 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6369 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6370 @end ifset
6371
6372 @ifset ELF
6373 @node Symver
6374 @section @code{.symver}
6375 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6376 @cindex symbol versioning
6377 @cindex versions of symbols
6378 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6379 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6380 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6381 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6382 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6383 shared library.
6384
6385 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6386 @smallexample
6387 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6388 @end smallexample
6389 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6390 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6391 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6392 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6393 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6394 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6395 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6396 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6397 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6398 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6399 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6400 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6401 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6402 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6403
6404 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6405 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6406 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6407 symbol table.
6408
6409 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6410 @smallexample
6411 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6412 @end smallexample
6413 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6414 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6415 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6416 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6417
6418 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6419 @smallexample
6420 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6421 @end smallexample
6422 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6423 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6424 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6425 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6426 @end ifset
6427
6428 @ifset COFF
6429 @node Tag
6430 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6431
6432 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6433 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6434 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6435 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6436 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6437 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6438 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6439 @ifset BOUT
6440
6441 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6442 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6443 ignores it.
6444 @end ifset
6445 @end ifset
6446
6447 @node Text
6448 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6449
6450 @cindex @code{text} directive
6451 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6452 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6453 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6454 is used.
6455
6456 @node Title
6457 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6458
6459 @cindex @code{title} directive
6460 @cindex listing control: title line
6461 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6462 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6463
6464 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6465 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6466
6467 @ifset COFF-ELF
6468 @node Type
6469 @section @code{.type}
6470
6471 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6472
6473 @ifset COFF
6474 @ifset ELF
6475 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6476 @subheading COFF Version
6477 @end ifset
6478
6479 @cindex COFF symbol type
6480 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6481 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6482 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6483 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6484
6485 @smallexample
6486 .type @var{int}
6487 @end smallexample
6488
6489 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6490 entry.
6491
6492 @ifset BOUT
6493 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6494 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6495 directive but ignores it.
6496 @end ifset
6497 @end ifset
6498
6499 @ifset ELF
6500 @ifset COFF
6501 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6502 @subheading ELF Version
6503 @end ifset
6504
6505 @cindex ELF symbol type
6506 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6507 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6508 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6509
6510 @smallexample
6511 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6512 @end smallexample
6513
6514 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6515 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6516 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6517 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6518
6519 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6520 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6521 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6522 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6523 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6524 assemblers.
6525
6526 The syntaxes supported are:
6527
6528 @smallexample
6529 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6530 .type <name>,#<type>
6531 .type <name>,@@<type>
6532 .type <name>,%<type>
6533 .type <name>,"<type>"
6534 @end smallexample
6535
6536 The types supported are:
6537
6538 @table @gcctabopt
6539 @item STT_FUNC
6540 @itemx function
6541 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6542
6543 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6544 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6545 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6546 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6547
6548 @item STT_OBJECT
6549 @itemx object
6550 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6551
6552 @item STT_TLS
6553 @itemx tls_object
6554 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6555
6556 @item STT_COMMON
6557 @itemx common
6558 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6559
6560 @item STT_NOTYPE
6561 @itemx notype
6562 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6563
6564 @item gnu_unique_object
6565 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6566 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6567 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6568 systems).
6569
6570 @end table
6571
6572 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6573
6574 @end ifset
6575 @end ifset
6576
6577 @node Uleb128
6578 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6579
6580 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6581 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6582 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6583 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6584
6585 @ifset COFF
6586 @node Val
6587 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6588
6589 @cindex @code{val} directive
6590 @cindex COFF value attribute
6591 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6592 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6593 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6594 entry.
6595 @ifset BOUT
6596
6597 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6598 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6599 @end ifset
6600 @end ifset
6601
6602 @ifset ELF
6603 @node Version
6604 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6605
6606 @cindex @code{version} directive
6607 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6608 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6609 @end ifset
6610
6611 @ifset ELF
6612 @node VTableEntry
6613 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6614
6615 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6616 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6617 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6618
6619 @node VTableInherit
6620 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6621
6622 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6623 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6624 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6625 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
6626 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6627 @end ifset
6628
6629 @node Warning
6630 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6631 @cindex warning directive
6632 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6633 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6634
6635 @node Weak
6636 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6637
6638 @cindex @code{weak} directive
6639 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6640 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6641
6642 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
6643 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6644 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6645
6646 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
6647 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
6648 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
6649
6650 @node Weakref
6651 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
6652
6653 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
6654 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
6655 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
6656 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
6657 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
6658 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
6659
6660 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
6661 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
6662 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
6663 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
6664 had the references to the alias removed.
6665
6666 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
6667 within the assembler.
6668
6669 @node Word
6670 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
6671
6672 @cindex @code{word} directive
6673 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
6674 separated by commas.
6675 @ifclear GENERIC
6676 @ifset W32
6677 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
6678 @end ifset
6679 @ifset W16
6680 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
6681 @end ifset
6682 @end ifclear
6683 @ifset GENERIC
6684
6685 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
6686 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
6687 @end ifset
6688
6689 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
6690 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
6691 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6692 @cindex difference tables altered
6693 @cindex altered difference tables
6694 @quotation
6695 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
6696 @end quotation
6697
6698 @ifset GENERIC
6699 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
6700 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
6701 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
6702 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
6703
6704 @end ifset
6705 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
6706 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
6707 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
6708 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
6709 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
6710 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
6711 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
6712 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
6713 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
6714 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
6715 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
6716 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
6717 @code{sym2}.
6718
6719 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
6720 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
6721 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
6722 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
6723 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
6724 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
6725 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
6726
6727 @ifset INTERNALS
6728 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
6729 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
6730 assembly language programmers.
6731 @end ifset
6732 @end ifset
6733 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6734
6735 @node Deprecated
6736 @section Deprecated Directives
6737
6738 @cindex deprecated directives
6739 @cindex obsolescent directives
6740 One day these directives won't work.
6741 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
6742 @table @t
6743 @item .abort
6744 @item .line
6745 @end table
6746
6747 @ifset ELF
6748 @node Object Attributes
6749 @chapter Object Attributes
6750 @cindex object attributes
6751
6752 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
6753 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
6754 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
6755 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
6756 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
6757 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
6758 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
6759 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
6760 newer generation at run-time.
6761
6762 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
6763 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
6764 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
6765 correctly.
6766
6767 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
6768 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
6769 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
6770 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
6771 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
6772 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
6773
6774 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
6775 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
6776
6777 @menu
6778 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6779 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
6780 @end menu
6781
6782 @node GNU Object Attributes
6783 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6784
6785 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
6786 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
6787
6788 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
6789 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
6790 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
6791 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
6792 architecture-dependent ones.
6793
6794 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
6795
6796 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
6797
6798 @table @r
6799 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
6800 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
6801 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
6802 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
6803 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
6804 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
6805 @end table
6806
6807 @subsection MIPS Attributes
6808
6809 @table @r
6810 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
6811 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6812
6813 @itemize @bullet
6814 @item
6815 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
6816 @item
6817 1 for files using the hardware floating-point with a standard double-precision
6818 FPU.
6819 @item
6820 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
6821 @item
6822 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6823 @item
6824 4 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit wide
6825 double-precision floating-point registers and 32-bit wide general
6826 purpose registers.
6827 @end itemize
6828 @end table
6829
6830 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
6831
6832 @table @r
6833 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
6834 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6835
6836 @itemize @bullet
6837 @item
6838 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
6839 @item
6840 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6841 @item
6842 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6843 @item
6844 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6845 @end itemize
6846
6847 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
6848 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6849
6850 @itemize @bullet
6851 @item
6852 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
6853 @item
6854 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
6855 @item
6856 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
6857 @item
6858 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
6859 @end itemize
6860 @end table
6861
6862 @node Defining New Object Attributes
6863 @section Defining New Object Attributes
6864
6865 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
6866 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
6867 mailing list.
6868
6869 @itemize @bullet
6870 @item
6871 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
6872 @item
6873 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
6874 @item
6875 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
6876 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
6877 @item
6878 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
6879 @item
6880 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
6881 @item
6882 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
6883 @end itemize
6884
6885 @end ifset
6886
6887 @ifset GENERIC
6888 @node Machine Dependencies
6889 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6890
6891 @cindex machine dependencies
6892 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
6893 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
6894 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
6895 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
6896 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
6897 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
6898 optimization.
6899
6900 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
6901 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
6902 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
6903
6904 @menu
6905 @ifset ALPHA
6906 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
6907 @end ifset
6908 @ifset ARC
6909 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
6910 @end ifset
6911 @ifset ARM
6912 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
6913 @end ifset
6914 @ifset AVR
6915 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
6916 @end ifset
6917 @ifset Blackfin
6918 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
6919 @end ifset
6920 @ifset CR16
6921 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
6922 @end ifset
6923 @ifset CRIS
6924 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
6925 @end ifset
6926 @ifset D10V
6927 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
6928 @end ifset
6929 @ifset D30V
6930 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
6931 @end ifset
6932 @ifset EPIPHANY
6933 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
6934 @end ifset
6935 @ifset H8/300
6936 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
6937 @end ifset
6938 @ifset HPPA
6939 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
6940 @end ifset
6941 @ifset I370
6942 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
6943 @end ifset
6944 @ifset I80386
6945 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
6946 @end ifset
6947 @ifset I860
6948 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
6949 @end ifset
6950 @ifset I960
6951 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
6952 @end ifset
6953 @ifset IA64
6954 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
6955 @end ifset
6956 @ifset IP2K
6957 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
6958 @end ifset
6959 @ifset LM32
6960 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
6961 @end ifset
6962 @ifset M32C
6963 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
6964 @end ifset
6965 @ifset M32R
6966 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
6967 @end ifset
6968 @ifset M680X0
6969 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
6970 @end ifset
6971 @ifset M68HC11
6972 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
6973 @end ifset
6974 @ifset MICROBLAZE
6975 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
6976 @end ifset
6977 @ifset MIPS
6978 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
6979 @end ifset
6980 @ifset MMIX
6981 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
6982 @end ifset
6983 @ifset MSP430
6984 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
6985 @end ifset
6986 @ifset NS32K
6987 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
6988 @end ifset
6989 @ifset SH
6990 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
6991 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
6992 @end ifset
6993 @ifset PDP11
6994 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
6995 @end ifset
6996 @ifset PJ
6997 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
6998 @end ifset
6999 @ifset PPC
7000 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7001 @end ifset
7002 @ifset RL78
7003 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7004 @end ifset
7005 @ifset RX
7006 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7007 @end ifset
7008 @ifset S390
7009 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7010 @end ifset
7011 @ifset SCORE
7012 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7013 @end ifset
7014 @ifset SPARC
7015 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7016 @end ifset
7017 @ifset TIC54X
7018 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7019 @end ifset
7020 @ifset TIC6X
7021 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7022 @end ifset
7023 @ifset TILEGX
7024 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7025 @end ifset
7026 @ifset TILEPRO
7027 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7028 @end ifset
7029 @ifset V850
7030 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7031 @end ifset
7032 @ifset XGATE
7033 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7034 @end ifset
7035 @ifset XSTORMY16
7036 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7037 @end ifset
7038 @ifset XTENSA
7039 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7040 @end ifset
7041 @ifset Z80
7042 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7043 @end ifset
7044 @ifset Z8000
7045 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7046 @end ifset
7047 @ifset VAX
7048 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7049 @end ifset
7050 @end menu
7051
7052 @lowersections
7053 @end ifset
7054
7055 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7056 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7057 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7058 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7059 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7060 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7061 @c in both conditional blocks.
7062
7063 @ifset ALPHA
7064 @include c-alpha.texi
7065 @end ifset
7066
7067 @ifset ARC
7068 @include c-arc.texi
7069 @end ifset
7070
7071 @ifset ARM
7072 @include c-arm.texi
7073 @end ifset
7074
7075 @ifset AVR
7076 @include c-avr.texi
7077 @end ifset
7078
7079 @ifset Blackfin
7080 @include c-bfin.texi
7081 @end ifset
7082
7083 @ifset CR16
7084 @include c-cr16.texi
7085 @end ifset
7086
7087 @ifset CRIS
7088 @include c-cris.texi
7089 @end ifset
7090
7091 @ifset Renesas-all
7092 @ifclear GENERIC
7093 @node Machine Dependencies
7094 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7095
7096 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7097 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7098 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7099 family.
7100
7101 @menu
7102 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7103 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7104 @end menu
7105 @lowersections
7106 @end ifclear
7107 @end ifset
7108
7109 @ifset D10V
7110 @include c-d10v.texi
7111 @end ifset
7112
7113 @ifset D30V
7114 @include c-d30v.texi
7115 @end ifset
7116
7117 @ifset EPIPHANY
7118 @include c-epiphany.texi
7119 @end ifset
7120
7121 @ifset H8/300
7122 @include c-h8300.texi
7123 @end ifset
7124
7125 @ifset HPPA
7126 @include c-hppa.texi
7127 @end ifset
7128
7129 @ifset I370
7130 @include c-i370.texi
7131 @end ifset
7132
7133 @ifset I80386
7134 @include c-i386.texi
7135 @end ifset
7136
7137 @ifset I860
7138 @include c-i860.texi
7139 @end ifset
7140
7141 @ifset I960
7142 @include c-i960.texi
7143 @end ifset
7144
7145 @ifset IA64
7146 @include c-ia64.texi
7147 @end ifset
7148
7149 @ifset IP2K
7150 @include c-ip2k.texi
7151 @end ifset
7152
7153 @ifset LM32
7154 @include c-lm32.texi
7155 @end ifset
7156
7157 @ifset M32C
7158 @include c-m32c.texi
7159 @end ifset
7160
7161 @ifset M32R
7162 @include c-m32r.texi
7163 @end ifset
7164
7165 @ifset M680X0
7166 @include c-m68k.texi
7167 @end ifset
7168
7169 @ifset M68HC11
7170 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7171 @end ifset
7172
7173 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7174 @include c-microblaze.texi
7175 @end ifset
7176
7177 @ifset MIPS
7178 @include c-mips.texi
7179 @end ifset
7180
7181 @ifset MMIX
7182 @include c-mmix.texi
7183 @end ifset
7184
7185 @ifset MSP430
7186 @include c-msp430.texi
7187 @end ifset
7188
7189 @ifset NS32K
7190 @include c-ns32k.texi
7191 @end ifset
7192
7193 @ifset PDP11
7194 @include c-pdp11.texi
7195 @end ifset
7196
7197 @ifset PJ
7198 @include c-pj.texi
7199 @end ifset
7200
7201 @ifset PPC
7202 @include c-ppc.texi
7203 @end ifset
7204
7205 @ifset RL78
7206 @include c-rl78.texi
7207 @end ifset
7208
7209 @ifset RX
7210 @include c-rx.texi
7211 @end ifset
7212
7213 @ifset S390
7214 @include c-s390.texi
7215 @end ifset
7216
7217 @ifset SCORE
7218 @include c-score.texi
7219 @end ifset
7220
7221 @ifset SH
7222 @include c-sh.texi
7223 @include c-sh64.texi
7224 @end ifset
7225
7226 @ifset SPARC
7227 @include c-sparc.texi
7228 @end ifset
7229
7230 @ifset TIC54X
7231 @include c-tic54x.texi
7232 @end ifset
7233
7234 @ifset TIC6X
7235 @include c-tic6x.texi
7236 @end ifset
7237
7238 @ifset TILEGX
7239 @include c-tilegx.texi
7240 @end ifset
7241
7242 @ifset TILEPRO
7243 @include c-tilepro.texi
7244 @end ifset
7245
7246 @ifset Z80
7247 @include c-z80.texi
7248 @end ifset
7249
7250 @ifset Z8000
7251 @include c-z8k.texi
7252 @end ifset
7253
7254 @ifset VAX
7255 @include c-vax.texi
7256 @end ifset
7257
7258 @ifset V850
7259 @include c-v850.texi
7260 @end ifset
7261
7262 @ifset XGATE
7263 @include c-xgate.texi
7264 @end ifset
7265
7266 @ifset XSTORMY16
7267 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7268 @end ifset
7269
7270 @ifset XTENSA
7271 @include c-xtensa.texi
7272 @end ifset
7273
7274 @ifset GENERIC
7275 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7276 @raisesections
7277 @end ifset
7278
7279 @node Reporting Bugs
7280 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7281 @cindex bugs in assembler
7282 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7283
7284 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7285
7286 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7287 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7288 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7289 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7290
7291 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7292 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7293
7294 @menu
7295 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7296 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7297 @end menu
7298
7299 @node Bug Criteria
7300 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7301 @cindex bug criteria
7302
7303 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7304
7305 @itemize @bullet
7306 @cindex fatal signal
7307 @cindex assembler crash
7308 @cindex crash of assembler
7309 @item
7310 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7311 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7312
7313 @cindex error on valid input
7314 @item
7315 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7316
7317 @cindex invalid input
7318 @item
7319 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7320 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7321 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7322
7323 @item
7324 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7325 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7326 @end itemize
7327
7328 @node Bug Reporting
7329 @section How to Report Bugs
7330 @cindex bug reports
7331 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7332
7333 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7334 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7335 contact that organization first.
7336
7337 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7338 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7339 distribution.
7340
7341 @ifset BUGURL
7342 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7343 to @value{BUGURL}.
7344 @end ifset
7345
7346 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7347 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7348 fact or leave it out, state it!
7349
7350 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7351 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7352 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7353 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7354 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7355 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7356 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7357 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7358 and the most helpful.
7359
7360 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7361 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7362 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7363
7364 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7365 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7366 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7367 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7368
7369 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7370
7371 @itemize @bullet
7372 @item
7373 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7374 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7375
7376 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7377 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7378
7379 @item
7380 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7381
7382 @item
7383 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7384 version number.
7385
7386 @item
7387 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7388 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7389
7390 @item
7391 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7392 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7393 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7394
7395 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7396 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7397
7398 @item
7399 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7400 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7401 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7402 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7403 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7404 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7405 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7406
7407 @item
7408 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7409 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7410
7411 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7412 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7413 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7414 make a mistake.
7415
7416 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7417 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7418 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7419 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7420 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7421 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7422 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7423 observations.
7424
7425 @item
7426 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7427 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7428 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7429 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7430 by line number.
7431
7432 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7433 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7434 @end itemize
7435
7436 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7437
7438 @itemize @bullet
7439 @item
7440 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7441
7442 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7443 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7444 changes will not affect it.
7445
7446 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7447 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7448 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7449 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7450
7451 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7452 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7453 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7454 less time, and so on.
7455
7456 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7457 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7458
7459 @item
7460 A patch for the bug.
7461
7462 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7463 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7464 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7465 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7466
7467 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7468 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7469 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7470 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7471
7472 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7473 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7474 help us to understand.
7475
7476 @item
7477 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7478
7479 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7480 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7481 @end itemize
7482
7483 @node Acknowledgements
7484 @chapter Acknowledgements
7485
7486 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7487 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7488 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7489 @c (January 1994),
7490 the maintainer is Ken Raeburn (email address @code{raeburn@@cygnus.com}).
7491
7492 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7493 more details?}
7494
7495 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7496 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7497 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7498
7499 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7500 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7501 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7502 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7503 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7504 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7505 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7506 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7507 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7508 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7509
7510 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7511 in format-specific I/O modules.
7512
7513 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7514 has done much work with it since.
7515
7516 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7517
7518 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7519
7520 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7521 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7522
7523 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7524 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7525 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7526 support a.out format.
7527
7528 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7529 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7530 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7531 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7532 targets.
7533
7534 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7535 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
7536 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7537 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7538 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7539 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7540 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7541
7542 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7543 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7544 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7545 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7546
7547 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7548
7549 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7550
7551 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7552 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7553 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7554 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7555
7556 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7557 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7558 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7559 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7560 and some initial 64-bit support).
7561
7562 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7563
7564 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7565 support for openVMS/Alpha.
7566
7567 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7568 flavors.
7569
7570 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7571 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7572
7573 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
7574 configuration enhancements.
7575
7576 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
7577
7578 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
7579 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
7580 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
7581 intentionally leaving anyone out.
7582
7583 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7584 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7585 @include fdl.texi
7586
7587 @node AS Index
7588 @unnumbered AS Index
7589
7590 @printindex cp
7591
7592 @bye
7593 @c Local Variables:
7594 @c fill-column: 79
7595 @c End:
This page took 0.192841 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.